2004 Civic Coupe Online Reference Owner`s Manual

2004 Civic Coupe Online Reference Owner`s Manual
2004 Civic Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................. ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 2
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 51
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ................................................................................................ 89
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 113
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 125
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 141
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 181
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 205
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) ........................................................ 217
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 221
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
This Owner’s Manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
vehicle, and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
This Owner’s Manual covers all
models of the Accord Coupe. You
may find descriptions of equipment
and features that are not on your
particular model.
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2004 Honda Accord was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a NOTICE: symbol. This information
is intended to help you avoid damage
to your Honda, other property, or the
environment.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
i
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.57)
GAUGES (P.65)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.22)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.96)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.78)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.91)
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
(P.165, 82)
2
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P.72)
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.120)
DIGITAL CLOCK (P.154)
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG (P.22)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.108)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.115)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.183)
HOOD RELEASE
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.180)
HANDLE
(P.166)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.103)
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.72)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.69)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.70)
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.30)
HAZARD
WARNING
BUTTON
(P.72)
STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.152)
CRUISE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.156)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.94)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.120)
HORN
(P.68)
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES*
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH (P.192)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.73)
TILT/TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
(P.74)
EX-V6 model without Navigation System is shown.
* : Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
3
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains how your airbag
work, and it tells you how to properly
restrain infants and children in your
vehicle.
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts .... 14
6. Adjust the Steering Wheel ..... 15
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 16
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 18
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 19
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 21
Airbag System Components ....... 21
How Your Front Airbags Work......... 22
Advanced Airbags ....................... 24
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 27
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 27
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 28
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 29
Airbag Service .............................. 30
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 32
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 32
All Children Should Sit in the
Back Seat .................................. 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 35
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Protecting Infants and Small
Childlen ..................................... 37
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH...................................... 41
Installing a Child Seat with
a Lap/Shoulder Belt ................ 43
Installing a Child Seat with
a Tether .................................... 45
Protecting Larger Children ............ 47
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Safety Labels .................................... 52
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal or side
collision. So even though your
vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in the back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
6
Driver and Passenger Safety
can use the belt properly without a
booster (see page 32 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 203 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(10) (8)
(3)
(9)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(4)
(1)
(7)
(6)
(2)
(5)
* : If equipped
(2)
(7)
Some safety features do not require
any action on your part. These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones, a collapsible
steering column, and seat belt
tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
(11)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags*
(9) Side Curtain Airbags*
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
safety features unless you remain
sitting in a proper position and
always wear your seat belts properly.
In fact, some safety features can
contribute to injuries if they are not
used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats).
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
8
Driver and Passenger Safety
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Airbags
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
22 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Standard on EX and all V 6 models and
all Canadian models
Optional on U.S. LX model
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 26 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Standard on U.S. 4-cylinder EX-L and
EX-V6 models
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions (see page 27 for more
information on how your side curtain
airbags work).
10
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags can pose hazards. To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright, and as far back from the
steering wheel while allowing full
control of the vehicle. A front
passenger should move their seat as
far back from the dashboard as
possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to ride in
the front. See pages 32 − 36 for
important guidelines on how to
properly protect infants, small
children, and larger children who
ride in your vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Your vehicle has a door monitor
indicator on the instrument panel to
indicate when a specific door is not
tightly closed.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
See page 78 for how to lock the
doors, and page 61 for how the
monitor indicator works.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel in and out (see page
74 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
12
Driver and Passenger Safety
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked into position. See
page 83 for how to adjust the front
seats.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
See page 83 for how to adjust seatbacks.
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 88 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Have passengers with adjustable
restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
5.Fasten and Position the Lap/
Shoulder Seat Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
very serious injuries in a crash.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
14
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your Honda dealer check the
belt as soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
6.Adjust the Steering Wheel
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face. This
provides optimal protection from the
front airbag.
7.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag. Being struck
by an inflating side airbag can
possibly result in serious injuries.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
See page 74 for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16
Driver and Passenger Safety
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp objects in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
On models with side airbags, do
not attach hard objects on or near
a door. If a side airbag or a side
Do not place the right rear floor
mat under the front passenger’s
seat. This could make the front
curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. Make sure the right
rear floor mat is hooked over the
floor mat anchor (see page 240 ).
Do not modify the front seats.
This could make the driver’s seat
position sensor or the front
passenger’s seat weight sensors
ineffective.
Do not place any items under the
front seats. This could cause
problems with the driver’s seat
position sensor or the front
passenger’s seat weight sensors
(see page 24 for more
information).
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) without fastening your belt, a
beeper will sound and the indicator
will blink. The beeper will stop after
several seconds, but the indicator
will stay on until the driver’s seat belt
is fastened.
If you do not fasten your seat belt
before the beeper stops, the
indicator will stop blinking but
remain on. If you continue driving
without fastening your seat belt, the
indicator will start blinking again and
18
Driver and Passenger Safety
the beeper will sound at regular
intervals.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap and shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page 43 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle, and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions,
and they should activate in any
collision severe enough to cause
front-airbag inflation.
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
However, the tensioners can be
activated during a collision in which
the front airbags do not deploy. In
this case, the airbags would not be
needed, but the additional restraint
could be helpful.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. Any belt that
is not in good condition or working
properly will not provide good
protection and should be replaced as
soon as possible.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Honda Warranty Information
booklet for details.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page 240 .
20
Driver and Passenger Safety
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Airbag System Components
(1)
(8)
(9)
(2)
(11)
(8)
(5)
Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 22 ).
On models equipped with two side
airbags, one for the driver and one
for a front passenger. The airbags
are stored in the outer edges of
the seat-backs. Both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners
(3)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(10)
(4)
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(6)
(10) Side Impact Sensors
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(10) (4)
(7)
(5)
(7)
On models equipped with two side
curtain airbags, one for each side
of the vehicle. The airbags are
stored in the front, center, and
rear pillars. The front and rear
pillars on both sides are marked
‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see
page 27 ).
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page 19 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
or side impact in models equipped
with side airbags.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when
the ignition is in the ON (II)
position.
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the seat position. If the
seat is too far forward, the airbag
will inflate with less force (see
page 25 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. These prevent the passenger’s
22
Driver and Passenger Safety
front airbag from inflating if the
weight is less than about 65 lbs
(30 kg) (see page 25 ).
How Your Front Airbags Work
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags (see
page 27 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 29 ).
On models equipped, an indicator
on the instrument panel that alerts
you that the front passenger’s side
airbag has been turned off (see
page 28 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
driver’s and front passenger’s front
airbags, at the appropriate time and
with the force needed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the airbag helps protect your
head and chest.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 24 ).
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
24
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at the same
threshold as a conventional airbag
because the occupant would need
extra protection.
It the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to prevent airbag-caused
injuries to short drivers and children
who ride in front.
For the advanced airbags to work
properly, occupants must sit upright
and wear their seat belts properly. If
a child seat is installed in the front, it
must be properly secured.
In addition, do not spill any liquids,
cover the sensors, or put any cargo
or metal objects under the front
seats. Ask rear seat passengers to
not put their feet under the front
seats. Any of these actions could
damage the sensors or prevent them
from working properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
a crash regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
When the airbag is turned off, an
indicator in the center of the
dashboard will come on indicating
‘‘Passenger Airbag Off’’ (see page
29 ).
If there is no passenger in the front
seat, the airbag will be off but the
indicator will not come on.
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
positioned too far forward, the
airbag will inflate sequentially,
regardless of the severity of the
impact.
If there is a problem with the seat
position sensor, the SRS indicator
will come on in the instrument panel.
In this case, the driver’s airbag will
inflate in the normal manner during
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. If the sensors detect
a total weight on the seat of about 65
lbs (30 kg) or less, the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
How Your Side Airbags Work
The passenger’s side airbag has a
cutoff system designed to turn off
the passenger’s side airbag if a child’s
head is in the airbag’s deployment
path (see page 28 ).
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Make sure the rear floor mat is
hooked to the floor mat anchor. If
not, the floor mat will prevent the
seat operation and the sensors
may not work properly.
26
Driver and Passenger Safety
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on, have the passenger sit upright.
Once the passenger is out of the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system will turn the airbag back
on and the indicator will go out.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the
impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will
inflate even if there are no occupants
on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your front airbags, the driver’s
seat position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors (see
page 24 ), or front seat belt
tensioners (see page 19 ).
On models with side airbags, this
indicator will also alert you to a
potential problem with your side
airbags, the passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system (see page
28 ), or the side curtain airbags.
Standard on U.S. EX-V6 model
Your vehicle is equipped with side
curtain airbags. These airbags are
stored in the front, center, and rear
pillars on both sides. The front and
rear pillars on both sides are marked
‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), this indicator will come on
briefly then go out. This tells you
that the system is working properly.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
28
Driver and Passenger Safety
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and the seat belt
tensioners may not work properly
when you need them.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
This indicator alerts you
that the passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does not mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans sideways and
the child’s head is in the side airbag
deployment path.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If a short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the side airbag
deployment path, the system may
also shut off the side airbag.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should come
on briefly and go out (see page 59 ).
If it doesn’t light, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
To reduce the chance of airbagcaused injuries, the system shuts off
the passenger’s front airbag when
the total weight on the front
passenger’s seat is about 65 lbs
(30 kg) or less.
If no one is riding in the front
passenger’s seat, the airbag will be
automatically shut off, but the
indicator will not come on.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off. It does not mean there is a
problem with the airbag.
However, if the indicator comes on
with no passenger in the front, or
with an adult in the seat, there may
be a problem with the advanced
airbag system. Have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold (65 lbs or 30
kg).
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in the back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
This indicator may come on and off
repeatedly if objects are placed on
the front passenger’s seat, or if the
interior temperature of the vehicle
changes suddenly when a door is
opened.
See page 24 for more information
about the passenger’s advanced
front airbag.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
tensioners must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized Honda dealer as soon
as possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
30
Driver and Passenger Safety
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact, and even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to liquid. If water or another liquid
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag cutoff
system from working properly.
Do not place any items under the
front seats. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor and
the front passenger’s weight
sensors ineffective.
Do not place the right rear floor
mat under the front passenger’s
seat. This could make the front
Do not do anything that would
increase or decrease weight on the
front passenger’s seat. Pushing or
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. Make sure the right
rear floor mat is hooked over the
floor mat anchor (see page 240 ).
pulling on the back of the seat,
placing heavy items in the back
seat pocket, pushing cargo against
the seat, or hanging heavy items
on the seat back can interfere with
the proper operation of the
passenger’s advanced front airbag.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting a
Honda dealer. Improperly
replacing or covering front seatback covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
side impact.
Do not modify the front seats.
This could make the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting a Honda
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact American
Honda at 800-999-1009.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
32
Driver and Passenger Safety
If you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a child in your
vehicle, be sure to read this section.
It begins with important general
guidelines, then presents special
information for infants, small
children, and larger children.
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 39 − 46 ).
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster until the seat belt fits them
properly (see pages 47 − 50 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in the
Back Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in the back seat.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating airbag when they ride in the
back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
To help prevent airbag-caused
injuries to children, this vehicle has
an advanced airbag system.
With this system, the front
passenger’s airbag is turned off if
sensors detect a total weight of less
than about 65 lbs (30 kg) on the seat
(see pages 24 − 26 for additional
information about how the front
passenger’s advanced airbag works).
Even if the passenger’s front airbag
is turned off, we strongly
recommend that children age 12 and
under ride properly restrained in a
back seat where they will be safer.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard and
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
34
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has three seating
positions in the back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry four
children in your vehicle, and a child
must ride in front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 47 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 11 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in the back seat. The back
seat is far safer for a child than the
front.
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
36
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition can accidentally set the
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
trunk and be seriously injured or
could die. Teach your children not
to play in or around vehicles.
Know how to operate the
emergency trunk opener and
decide if your children should be
shown how to use this feature (see
page 82 ).
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Placement
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Child Seat Type
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
A rear-facing child seat should
always be installed in a back seat, not
in the front. Even with adbanced
airbags, which can automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off
(see page 24 ), a back seat is the
safest place for an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking the
seat-back in the desired position.
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Or it could push against the frontpassenger’s seat-back, interfering
with the proper operation of the
passenger’s advanced front airbag
(see pages 24 − 26 ).
Protecting Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat in a different back
seating position or get a smaller rearfacing child seat.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Child Seat Type
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
38
Driver and Passenger Safety
We also recommend that a small
child uses the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front. Even with
advanced airbags, which can
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 24 ), a
back seat is the safest place for a
small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose between a conventional
child seat, or one designed for use
with the Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 41 ).
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position, or positions,
where the seat will be used.
40
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid’’. Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the back seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for a rearfacing child seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
The location of each lower anchor is
marked with a small illustrated circle
above the point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
center seat belt away from the
lower anchors.
LOWER ANCHOR MARKS
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the outer
rear seats. The lower anchors are
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom, and are to be used only
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and
anchors.
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, and attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats have
a rigid-type connection as shown
above.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connection as shown
above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
42
Driver and Passenger Safety
5. Route the tether strap through the
legs of the head restraint, then
attach the hook to the anchorage
point as shown.
6. Make sure the strap is not twisted,
then tighten the strap according to
the child seat maker’s instructions.
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
the rear seat and the front passenger
seat have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
44
Driver and Passenger Safety
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is firmly secured. If
the child seat is not secure,
unlatch the belt, allow it to retract
fully, then repeat these steps.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Anchorage Point
COVER
ANCHOR
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available. (Tethers are required in
Canada.)
1. After securing the child seat in the
desired position (see page 43 ), lift
the head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the top of the
seat-back and through the head
restraint legs.
2. Lift the anchor point lid, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center Anchorage Point
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 43 ), route the
tether strap over the top of the
seat-back.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted, then tighten the strap
according to the seat-maker’s
instructions.
46
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
Allowing a large child age 12 or
under to sit in front can result in
injury or death if the passenger’s
front airbag inflates.
If a large child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
Using a Booster Seat
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster meets federal
safety standards (see page 40 ) and
that you follow the booster seat
maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster must
ride in front, move the vehicle seat
as far to the rear as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in the
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states also require children to
use a booster until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.
48
Driver and Passenger Safety
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
Even with advanced front airbag, the
back seat is the safest place for a
child of any age or size.
If the passenger’s front airbag is on,
and it inflates in a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the airbag
can cause serious injuries to a child
who is unrestrained, improperly
restrained, sitting too close to the
airbag, or out of position.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying side airbag,
the child could receive possibly
serious injuries.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front.
There are other important factors
you should consider.
Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 47 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster, the child should not sit in
front.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective, and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk lid open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk lid open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which is removed by
the owner), contact your Honda
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
On models without side airbags
On models with side
curtain airbags
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
On models with side airbags
Canadian models
52
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
On cars with side airbags
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian models
On cars with side curtain airbags
U.S. models
Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Main Menu
54
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Control Locations ............................ 56
Instument Panel ............................... 57
Instument Panel Indicators ............ 58
Maintenance Required Indicator ... 63
Gauges .............................................. 65
Odometer ...................................... 65
Outside Temperature
Indicator .................................... 66
Trip Meter .................................... 66
Temperature Gauge .................... 67
Fuel Gauge ................................... 67
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 68
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 69
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 70
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 72
Hazard Warning ............................... 72
Rear Window Defogger .................. 73
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 74
Keys and Locks ................................ 75
Immobilizer System......................... 76
Ignition Switch ................................. 77
Power Door Locks ........................... 78
Remote Transmitter ........................ 79
Trunk................................................. 82
Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 82
Seats .................................................. 83
Seat Heaters ..................................... 90
Power Windows ............................... 91
Moonroof .......................................... 94
Mirrors .............................................. 95
Parking Brake .................................. 97
Interior Convenience Items ............ 98
Glove Box ..................................... 99
Beverage Holders ........................ 99
Console Compartment .............. 100
Center CD Pocket ..................... 100
Coin Pocket ................................ 101
Sun Visor .................................... 101
Vanity Mirror ............................. 102
Coat Hook ................................... 102
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 103
Accessory Power Sockets......... 103
Interior Lights ................................ 103
Instruments and Controls
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.57)
GAUGES(P.65)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.72)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.96)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.120)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.154)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.78)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.108)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.115)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.91)
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
(P.165, 82)
56
Instruments and Controls
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.166)
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKETS
(P.103)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.60)
LOW OIL PRESSURE CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.63)
INDICATOR (P.58, 268)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.58, 269)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.63)
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.60)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.63)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
INDICATOR (P.60)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.61)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR (P.63)
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR (P.61)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.59)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.59)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.269)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR* (P.59)
*
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62, 155)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.62)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.58)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instruments and Controls
57
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
The seat belt system includes an
indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 268 .
If you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II) before fastening your seat belt,
the beeper sounds and the indicator
flashes. If you do not fasten your
seat belt before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops flashing but remains
on.
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 269 .
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
58
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 269 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
It is a reminder to check the
parking brake. If you drive at
certain speeds without fully
releasing the parking brake, the
beeper sounds continuously.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator lights briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II). If it comes on at any other time,
it indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or front passenger’s weight
sensors. For more information, see
page 27 .
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). If
it comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page 28 .
2. If it remains lit after you fully
release the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 271 .
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on at any other time, there is a
problem in the ABS. If this happens,
have your vehicle checked by your
Honda dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For more
information, see page 189 .
TCS Activation Indicator
On all V6 models
On all V6 models
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on with the TCS
Activation Indicator, there is a
problem with the TCS. For more
information on the TCS, see page
191 .
2. It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
3. If it comes on and stays on when
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
This indicator normally also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II). If it
comes on and stays on at any other
time, or it does not come on when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), there is a problem with the TCS.
Take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. See page 191 for
more information on the TCS.
60
Instruments and Controls
Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). It will go off if you
have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 76 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Door and Trunk Open Monitor
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this display if the trunk or either
door is not closed tightly.
All the indicators in the monitor
display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II).
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicators do not blink
or blink rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page 237 ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signaling.
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning button, both turn signal
indicators blink. All turn signals on
the outside of the vehicle should
flash.
Instruments and Controls
61
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) without turning off the
light switch, this indicator will
remain on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the driver’s
door.
Security System Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
62
Instruments and Controls
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
155 for more information on the
security system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators, Maintenance Required Indicator
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II)
with the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
you turn on the headlights or release
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. See page
70 for information on the headlight
controls.
Cruise Main Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the Cruise Control System
by pressing the Master Button. (see
page 156 .)
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
156 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Maintenance Required
Indicator
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for the
vehicle’s scheduled maintenance
under normal driving conditions. The
indicator does not reflect severe
maintenance intervals.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on page 205 (4-cylinder
models) or page 210 (6-cylinder
models).
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 224 ).
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page 71 ).
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Required Indicator
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
1. Turn off the engine.
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
64
Instruments and Controls
2. Press and hold the Select/Reset
knob in the instrument panel, then
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Hold the knob for about 10
seconds until the indicator resets.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
The gauges illuminate when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
The odometer and the outside
temperature indicator use the same
display. To switch the display
between the odometer and the
outside temperature, press the
Select/Reset knob. When you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), what
you last selected is displayed.
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
TRIP METER
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
U.S. model is shown.
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
On 4-cylinder EX-L and 6-cylinder EX
models, and all EX models in Canada
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.
models, and in Centigrade in
Canadian models. To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the temperature reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h).
When you start your trip, the sensor
is not fully acclimatized, therefore it
may take several minutes until the
proper temperature is displayed.
66
Instruments and Controls
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer/outside
temperature display by pressing the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each
trip meter works independently, so
you can keep track of two different
distances.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press the Select/Reset
knob for ten seconds. The following
sequence will appear for one second
each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
−1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2,
−1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the Select/Reset knob. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), what you last selected is
displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Both trip meters will reset to ‘‘0.0’’ if
the vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise into the upper half of the
gauge. If it reaches the red (Hot)
mark, pull safely to the side of the
road. Turn to page 266 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
NOTICE: Avoid driving with an
extremely low f uel level. Running out
of f uel could cause the engine to
misf ire, damaging the catalytic
converter.
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.70)
HORN*
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS (P.72)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.69)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.72)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.152)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.120)
MOONROOF
SWITCH
(P.94)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.73)
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM ON/OFF SWITCH
(P.192)
TILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT
(P.74)
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
*
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
68
Instruments and Controls
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.30)
CRUISE CONTROLS
(P.156)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
INT − The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low
5. HI − High
6 Windshield Washers
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20 km/h).
While the vehicle is stopped and in
gear, the wipers sweep the
windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn Signal and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever in
the proper direction and hold it. The
lever will return to center when you
release it or complete a turn.
Headlights On − Rotating the
switch on the left lever to the
‘‘
’’ position turns on the parking
lights, taillights, side-marker lights,
and rear license plate lights.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. Headlights on
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the Lights On
indicator comes on as a reminder.
70
Instruments and Controls
High Beams − To turn on, push
the lever forward until you hear a
click. The blue high beam indicator
will come on (see page 63 ). Pull it
back to return to low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
parking lights, taillights, and license
plate lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the ‘‘
’’
or ‘‘
’’ position, remove the key,
then open and close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning
Instrument Panel Brightness
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Hazard Warning
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off in about 30 seconds after closing
that door.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
The Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignition switch, then go to normal
72
Instruments and Controls
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), the
illumination turns off in about 10
seconds.
To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to
or
. Turning the Select/Reset
knob fully to the right until you hear
a click will cancel the reduced brightness.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Window Defogger
Manual A/C type shown
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above/in the button lights to show
the defogger is on. It also shuts off
when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the vehicle.
Auto A/C type shown
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Vehicles with navigation system
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Instruments and Controls
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel Adjustment
3. Move the steering wheel so it
points to your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
See page 15 for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
5. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
1. Insert the key in the ignition
switch, and unlock the steering
column.
2. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
74
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
MASTER
VALET KEY
KEY
(LIGHT GREY)
NUMBER KEY WITH
REMOTE
TAG
TRANSMITTER
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact a Honda
dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
76
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, you must push the
key in slightly. If your vehicle has an
automatic transmission, the shift
lever must also be in park.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
On automatic transmission model,
the shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and
push the lock tab down or push the
top of the master switch, then close
the door.
Lockout Prevention
To lock both doors, push the top of
the master door lock switch on
either door, or press the lock tab
down on the driver’s door, or use the
key on the outside lock on the driver’s
door.
Pushing the bottom of either master
door lock switch will unlock both
doors.
The lock tab on the passenger’s door
lock and unlock only that door.
Pulling up on the driver’s door lock
tab only unlocks the driver’s door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, both
doors unlock.
You can open or close the windows
by using the key in the driver’s door
(see page 93 ).
78
Instruments and Controls
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the top of the switch
on the open passenger’s door will
lock both doors.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
LED
PANIC
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock both doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and (if equipped)
that the security system has set. You
cannot lock it if either door is not
fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the passenger’s door.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you push the button. If
you do not open either door within
30 seconds, they will automatically
relock and the security system sets
(except for 4-cylinder LX model).
You cannot unlock it if the key is in
the ignition switch.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) and
the spotlights (if the switch is in the
Door position) will come on when
you press the UNLOCK button. If
you do not open either door, the
lights stay on for about 30 seconds,
then fade out. If you relock the doors
with the remote transmitter before
30 seconds have elapsed, the lights
will go off immediately.
You can also open both power
windows from outside the vehicle
with the remote transmitter (see
page 93 ).
TRUNK RELEASE − Press this
button for about one second to open
the trunk. You cannot open it if the
key is in the ignition switch.
PANIC − Press this button for
about two seconds to attract
attention: the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter or turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
BATTERY
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by a Honda dealer.
TAB
SCREW
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
80
Instruments and Controls
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (+ side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Trunk
Trunk
Pull
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 51 .
Emergency Trunk Opener
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
You can open the trunk in two ways:
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
MASTER
KEY
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
1. Lock the trunk release handle
with the master key.
2. Give the person the valet key.
82
Instruments and Controls
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside. To open the trunk, push the
release lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page 36 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
All V6 models, the 4-cylinder EX-L
model, and all Canadian EX models
have a power adjustable driver’s seat.
The 4-cylinder EX model has a
power seat bottom height
adjustment. All other driver’s seat
adjustments in this model are
manual.
Manual Seat Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The 4-cylinder LX model has manual
driver’s seat adjustments (see next
column).
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Driver’s Seat Power Height
Adjustment
On 4-cylinder LX model
On 4-cylinder EX model
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push down the lever
repeatedly.
The height of your driver’s seat is
power adjustable. Pull up on the
switch to raise the seat. Push it down
to lower the seat.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
84
Instruments and Controls
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Raises or lowers the
seat.
Power Seat Adjustments
On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder
EX-L model
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Adjusts the seatback angle forward
or backward.
Moves the seat
forward and
backward.
Moves the front of
the seat up or down
and the rear of the
seat up or down.
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Armrest
Rear Seat Access
Driver’s Side
RELEASE LEVER
On all EX and EX-V6 models
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
86
Instruments and Controls
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
Make sure the passenger’s hands or
fingers are away from the armrest
before moving it.
On all V6 models and 4-cylinder EX-L
model
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
the release lever up on the side of
the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
After a passenger gets into the back
seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position and push the whole
seat backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
Passenger’s Side
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
On LX and EX models
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
RELEASE LEVER
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push downward on
the release lever at the base of the
seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward and the entire seat will move
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
Instruments and Controls
87
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
Head Restraints
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
FRONT
REAR
Your vehicle has adjustable head
restraints on the front seats. They
are also on the outside positions of
the rear seat.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
88
Instruments and Controls
RELEASE BUTTON
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats
To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down, then let go of the release.
Folding Rear Seat
GUIDE
MASTER KEY
The left and right halves can be
folded separately from inside the
vehicle or inside the trunk. To fold
down the seat-back from inside the
vehicle, insert the master key in the
lock on the rear shelf. To fold down
the driver’s side, turn the key
clockwise, pull down the top of the
seat-back, then release the key. To
fold down the passenger’s side, turn
the key counterclockwise and
perform the same procedure.
CENTER
SHOULDER BELT
When storing cargo, you can move
the rear center shoulder belt out of
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
Pull
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
89
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seats, Seat Heaters
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatback whenever the seat-back is in its
upright position.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
173 .
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 51 .
Seat Heaters
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
SEAT
HEATER
SWITCH
On EX-V6 model and EX-L model
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seatback. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters.
Push the front of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
90
Instruments and Controls
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
You vehicle’s windows are
electrically-powered. Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) to raise or
lower either window.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it down
until the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
AUTO − To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
92
Instruments and Controls
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is OFF, and the
passenger’s window cannot be raised
or lowered. To cancel this feature,
push on the switch again to get it to
pop out. Keep the MAIN switch off
when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window
unintentionally.
Auto Reverse − If the driver’s
window runs into any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
The power window system has a keyoff delay function. The windows will
still operate for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either door cancels the
delay function. You must turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) again
before you can raise or lower the
windows.
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
You can open both windows from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s door unlocks, and
both windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
3. To open the windows further,
press the button again.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
UNLOCK BUTTON
Open
Close
Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
93
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. Both windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
key.
4. To open the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within
10 seconds).
4. To close the windows further, turn
and hold the key again (within
10 seconds).
Moonroof
NOTE: If the window stops before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
NOTE: If the window stops before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. Both windows
start to close. To stop the windows,
release the key.
94
Instruments and Controls
MOONROOF SWITCH
On all EX and EX-V6 models
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be ON (II).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moonroof, Mirrors
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
(
). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the upper part of the
switch (
). To open the
moonroof, press and hold the lower
part of the switch (
). Release
the switch when the moonroof gets
to the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either door. You must then turn the
ignition to ON (II) for the moonroof
to operate.
Mirrors
TAB
NOTICE: If you try to open the
moonroof in below-f reezing
temperatures, or when it is covered
with snow or ice, you can damage the
moonroof panel or motor.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
3. Push or pull the adjustment knob
right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
4. When you finish, turn the
adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
96
Instruments and Controls
On all Canadian models
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking Brake
NOTICE: Driving the vehicle with the
parking brake applied can damage the
rear brakes and axles.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running (see page 59 ).
If you drive at certain speeds without
fully releasing the parking brake, the
beeper sounds continuously.
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDER
SUN VISOR
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
BEVERAGE HOLDER
VANITY MIRROR
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
COIN POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
98
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Beverage Holders
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Instruments and Controls
99
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
RIGHT LEVER
Center CD Pocket
LEFT LEVER
Push
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the right lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
100
Instruments and Controls
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest.
The tray in the console compartment
has a coin holder.
On U.S. vehicles without navigation
system and all Canadian models
To open the center CD pocket, pushdown on the center of the lid to
unlatch it. It will swing open
automatically. To close it, push the
lid down until it latches. This pocket
can store up to 12 CDs.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Coin Pocket
Sun Visor
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip and swing it out.
SUN VISOR
EXTENSION
On vehicles with side curtain airbags
To open the coin pocket, pull the lid
up. To close it, push the lid down
until it latches. The compartment
cannot be used as an ashtray.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the sun visor extension
over the rear view mirror.
On vehicles without side curtain airbags
In this position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension. Do not use the sun visor
extension over the rear view mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Instruments and Controls
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Vanity Mirror
On vehicles with side curtain airbags
Coat Hook
COAT HOOK
Do not put a coat hanger or
hard objects on a coat hook.
This could result in injuries if
your side curtain airbag inflates.
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it. The lights beside the mirror come
on when you pull up the cover.
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
102
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Sunglasses Holder
Accessory Power Sockets
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Ceiling Light
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
OFF
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open either door.
Unlock the doors with the key or
remote transmitter.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
After both doors are closed tightly,
the light dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
Spotlights
DOOR
ACTIVATED
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open with
the key not in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after three
minutes.
104
Instruments and Controls
OFF
LX and LX-V6 models
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
EX and EX-V6 models
On EX and EX-V6 models
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open either
door. In the OFF position, the lights
do not come on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Courtesy Lights
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
DOOR LIGHT
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
COURTESY LIGHT
On EX and EX-V6 models
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
Instruments and Controls
105
Main Menu
106
Main Menu
Comfort and Convenience Features
The heating and air conditioning
systems in your Honda provide a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section describes those features and how to
use them.
On all models except for 4-cylinder LX
model
Your Honda has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
Navigation Systems are available on
U.S. models only.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
Honda.
Vents, Heating, and A/C ............. 108
Using the A/C ........................... 113
To Cool or Heat
Automatically ........................ 115
Dual Temperature Control .......... 117
Climate Control Sensors .............. 119
Playing the Radio .......................... 120
Radio Reception ............................ 126
Playing the XM Satellite
Radio .......................................... 128
Playing a CD .................................. 134
CD Changer ................................... 137
Protecting Your CDs .................... 142
CD Player Error Messages ......... 143
CD Changer Error Messages ..... 144
Playing a Tape ............................... 146
Steering Wheel Controls ............. 152
Radio Theft Protection ................. 153
Setting the Clock .......................... 154
Security System ............................ 155
Cruise Control ............................... 156
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ................................ 159
Comfort and Convenience Features
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX, EX and LX-V6 models
Without Navigation System
4-cylinder EX-L model and EX-V6 model
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’ S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
PASSENGER’ S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
MODE
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
AUTO
BUTTON
MODE BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
DUAL
DEFROST
BUTTON BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
108
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
With Navigation System (U.S. vehicles only)
4-cylinder EX-L model and EX-V6 model
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) ICONS
A/C BUTTON
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL
ICONS
DRIVER’S
SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
OFF
BUTTON
AUTO
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
DEFROST
BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
For EX-L (EX model with leather
interior) and EX-V6 model, see page
115 for Automatic Climate Control
and Manual Operations information.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
For vehicles with Navigation System
You can manually select the fan
speed. Press the A/C button to view
the display, then press any of the fan
control icons.
Press the DUAL button. The green
indicator in the button will come on.
The driver and passenger can each
select the temperature control
buttons ( ▲ or ▼ ) to the
desired setting.
Fan Control
On all models except for EX-L and
EX-V6 models
Turn this dial clockwise to increase
fan speed and increase the airflow.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
For Vehicles without Navigation System
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control
buttons (
or
). The fan
speed is shown by vertical bars in
the display.
Temperature Control
On all models except for EX-L and
EX-V6 models
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, both sides adjust to the
same temperature.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Dual Button
The driver and passenger can select
independent temperature settings.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
For vehicles without Navigation System
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page 117 ).
Push the DUAL button. When the
indicator in the button is lit, turn the
dials to adjust the temperature.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/
Icons
On all models except for EX-L and
EX-V6 models
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The light
above the button is on when the A/C
is on.
110
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
For Vehicles without Navigation System
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF selected in the
display.
Recirculation Button
When the light in/above the button
is on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the light is off, air is brought
in from the outside of the vehicle
(Fresh Air mode).
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Press the A/C button to view the
display. Touching ON or OFF in the
display turns the air conditioning on
and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C
OFF in the display.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to Fresh Air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 73 ).
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons or
icons to select the vents the air flows
from. Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
For vehicles without Navigation System
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
For vehicles with Navigation System
Press the A/C button to view the
display, then touch any of the mode
icons on the display.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays
on with the indicator off.
112
Comfort and Convenience Features
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
MAX A/C Button
On all models except for EX-L and
EX-V6 models
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
1. Set the temperature control dial or
the button to the lower limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and Fresh Air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming through the
system.
Except for EX-L and EX-V6 models with
Navigation System
.
1. Select
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to Fresh
Air mode.
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On EX-L and EX-V6 models with
Navigation System
1. Press the A/C button, the Manual
Operation of A/C screen will
appear.
2. Select the desired mode and fan
speed icons on the display.
3. Adjust the warmth with the
temperature buttons (▲ or ▼).
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
67 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
Except for EX-L and EX-V6 models with
Navigation System
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light above the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected. The display shows A/C
ON.
2. Make sure the temperature
control dial is set to the lower limit.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
the Recirculation mode. If the
outside air is dry, select the Fresh
Air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models with
Navigation System
1. Press the A/C button, the Manual
Operation of A/C screen will
appear.
2. Select the ON icon on the display.
3. Select the desired temperature
and MODE selections. If the
outside air is humid, select the
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select the Fresh Air
mode.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in Fresh Air mode.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
On all models except for EX-L and
EX-V6 models
To cool with the interior with MAX
A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select the MAX A/C mode. The
system automatically turns on the
A/C, selects
, and switches to
the Recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
1. Switch the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and Fresh Air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature control
dial or buttons to your preference.
Once the engine is warmed up, this
setting is suitable for all driving
conditions.
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
. When you select
2. Select
, the system automatically
switches to Fresh Air mode and
turns on the A/C. The A/C
indicator will not come on, if it was
off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature control
dial or buttons so the airflow feels
warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the side vents.
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
114
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to Fresh
Air mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator will not come
on, if it was off to start with.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below it. This will
send more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select the Fresh
Air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
To Cool or Heat Automatically
Using Automatic Climate Control
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
The Automatic Climate Control
system can adjust the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
1. Press the Auto button. With
Navigation System, the light in the
button comes on.
2. Without Navigation System
Set the desired temperature by
turning the Temperature Control
dial. You will see AUTO in the
system’s display.
EX-L and EX-V6 models with Navigation
System
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver and passenger. If the driver’s
side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
With Navigation System
Set the desired temperature by
pressing the ▲ to raise the
temperature or the ▼ to lower the
temperature. The selected
temperature will show in the upper
display.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air to raise or lower the
interior temperature to the
temperature you selected.
If you set the temperature to its
lower limit (Lo) or its highest limit
(Hi), the system runs at full cooling
or heating only. It does not regulate
the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
Dual Temperature Control − When
the indicator in the Dual button is on,
the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature can be controlled
independently (see page 117 ).
116
Comfort and Convenience Features
Manual Operation
To Turn Everything Off
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Except for EX-L and EX-V6 models
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
System when it is in AUTO. All other
features remain automatically
controlled.
Turning the fan speed and
temperature control dials all the way
to left shuts off the system
completely.
Without Navigation System
If you press OFF, the Climate
Control system shuts off completely.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Manual selections will cause the
word AUTO in the display to go out.
With Navigation System
If you press the A/C button next to
the display, the manual selections
will show in the display. Manual
selection will cause the light in the
AUTO button to turn off.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
With Navigation System
When the Climate Control System is
turned OFF, the temperature in the
upper display will also turn off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Without Navigation System
Without Navigation System
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the passenger.
With Navigation System
Your vehicle has four temperature
control buttons, two for the driver,
and two for the passenger.
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons
when the green indicator in the
DUAL button is lit.
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DUAL BUTTON
With Navigation System
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons
Push AUTO or
. The selected
temperatures appears in the display
(in the upper display with the
navigation system). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the
same temperature by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature control dial
or buttons.
DRIVER’S SIDE
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
CONTROL BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
117
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or
press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
side to a different value than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’.
118
Comfort and Convenience Features
DRIVER’S SIDE
PASSENGER’S SIDE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Comfort and Convenience Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
LX model
EX and LX-V6 models
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
TUNE BAR
A.SEL
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET
BARS
PRESET
BARS
SEEK BAR
SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
120
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
EX-L and EX-V6 models
without Navigation System
(U.S. Vehicles only)
EX-L and EX-V6 models
(Canadian Vehicles only)
AM/FM BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO
INDICATOR
A.SEL
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
A.SEL
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET
BARS
PRESET
BARS
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK
BAR
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
121
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
EX-L and EX-V6 models
with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles only)
UPPER DISPLAY
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK BAR
PRESET ICONS
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
AUDIO SELECT ICON
122
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN
ICON
SOUND ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the same knob.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY
button will also turn on the system.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
XM Satellite Radio information is
available on page 128 .
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset bars/icons, and AUTO
SELECT .
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar or
knob to tune the radio to a desired
frequency. Press the
side of the
bar or turn the knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, and
press the
side or turn the knob
to the left to tune to a lower
frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
bar, then release it.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it, or touch the SCAN
icon on vehicles with navigation
system. You will see SCAN in the
display. The system will scan for a
station with a strong signal. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about five seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will the
scan for the next strong station and
play it for five seconds. When it plays
a station you want to listen to, press
the SCAN button or touch the SCAN
icon again.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
Preset − Each side of the bars (1−
6) or preset icon can store one
frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each side of
the preset bar or each preset icon.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the Auto Select feature
to find stations in the local area.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
First push the AUDIO DISPLAY
button to view the preset icons.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Press the left or right side of the
bar or icon and hold it until you
hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
stations on FM.
124
Comfort and Convenience Features
Press the A. SEL button or touch the
AUTO SELECT icon. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display (the upper
display on vehicles with navigation
system), and the system goes into
scan mode for several seconds. It
stores the frequencies of six AM,
and twelve FM stations in the preset
bars or icons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar or icon if Auto
Select cannot find a strong station
for every preset bar or icon.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
icons as described previously.
To turn off Auto Select, press the
A.SEL button or touch the AUTO
SELECT icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the Bass (BAS), Treble
(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader
(FAD) setting. On vehicles with
navigation system, touch the
SOUND icon or press the TUNE
knob.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
On vehicles with navigation system
If you want to adjust the sound while
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
Balance/Fader − These two
modes adjusts the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
On vehicles without navigation system
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘
’’ in the display.
With Navigation System
FADER ADJUST ICONS
SOUND GRID
BALANCE
ADJUST ICONS
RETURN ICON
BASS ADJUST ICONS
TREBLE ASJUST ICONS
On vehicles with navigation system
Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
TRE icons. The adjustment shows
you the current setting. Touch the
left or right bars on the sound grid.
Balance is equalized when the
vertical lines are centered on the
grid. Touch the front or rear bars on
the sound grid. The fader is
equalized when the horizontal lines
are centered on the grid.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode. On vehicles
with navigation system, touch the
RETURN icon to go back to the
audio screen.
Comfort and Convenience Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
126
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Reception
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
Comfort and Convenience Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
CATEGORY/CHANNEL
MODE INDICATOR
CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR
CD/SAT
BUTTON
DISP
BUTTON
CD/SAT
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
SEEK/
SKIP
BAR
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET ICONS
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK/
SKIP
BAR
CH/DISC BAR
TUNE KNOB
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB
MODE ICON
SCAN ICON
128
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Satellite Digital Radio
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii, Alaska,
and Canada.
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.
models only.
To Play XM Satellite Radio
The ignition must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on:
To Select a Channel
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
Vehicles with Navigation System
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob, the CD/SAT, or AUDIO
button.
Vehicles without Navigation System
Push any of the following: PWR/
VOL knob or the CD/SAT button.
TUNE −
Vehicles with Navigation System
Turn the TUNE knob to change
channels. Turn the knob right for
higher numbered channels and left
for lower numbered channels.
Vehicles without Navigation System
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
Press the TUNE bar to change
channel selections. Press
for
higher numbered channels and
for lower numbered channels.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)− The
SEEK/SKIP function selects the
various categories in XM, such as
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.
Push the
to change the
category forward. Push the
to
change the category backward. To
search for channels within a
category, turn the TUNE knob
clockwise or press the TUNE bar
.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all channels for 5 seconds.
To activate the function, push the
SCAN button. Push it again to get
out of the sequence.
Preset − Each preset icon or each
side of the preset bar can store one
channel in XM1 and one in XM2.
1. Push the SAT button, you will see
XM1 or XM2.
Vehicles with Navigation System
DISP − Press and release this
button to change the display. The
display will change in the following
sequence: channel name, channel
number, category, artist name, and
music title.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
3. Pick a preset icon or number and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat step 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and six on
XM2.
130
Comfort and Convenience Features
On vehicles with navigation system
Once your XM channels are preset,
pressing either side of the CH/DISC
bar will select your preset channels.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Satellite Radio Signals
Satellite radio receives signals from
two satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
Signal may be
blocked by
mountains or
large obstacles
to the south.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the south side of an
east/west mountain road with a
mountain on the south side of the
road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road
Driving in the tunnels
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff or hill to the south
of you
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
132
Comfort and Convenience Features
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the CD/SAT
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number.
To get your XM Satellite radio ID
number:
Turn the TUNE knob or press the
TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the
display. Your ID number will appear
in the display.
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
SAT Radio mode while you await
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While awaiting activation, make sure
your vehicle remains in an open area
with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
and you will be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
Comfort and Convenience Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
LX model
EX and LX-V6 models
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
AM/FM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
TRACK NUMBER
CD LOAD
INDICATOR
PRT BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
RDM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
CD LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
134
EJECT BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
EX-L and EX-V6 models
without Navigation System
(U.S. Vehicles only)
EX-L and EX-V6 models
(Canadian Vehicles only)
TRACK NUMBER
CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD BUTTON
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
DISC
NUMBER
CD BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
PRT BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
LOAD BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
CD SLOT
CD LOAD INDICATOR
PWR/VOL KNOB
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
EX-L and EX-V6 models
with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles only)
UPPER DISPLAY
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
CD/SAT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK/
SKIP BAR
AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
TRACK DISC
RPT
SCAN
ICON ICON TRACK
SCAN ICON
CH/DISC BAR
DISC
RPT
ICON
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
LOAD BUTTON
136
Comfort and Convenience Features
RANDOM ICON
CD
LOAD INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
To Play a CD
To load or play CD’s, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player/CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To select the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
LX model
Insert a CD into the CD slot. The
drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the system
reaches the end of the disc, it will
return to the beginning and play the
disc again.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
To play the tape when a CD is
playing, insert a tape in the player
(optional). If a tape is in the player,
press the AUX button. Press the CD
button again to switch back to the
CD player. The cassette player is
optional on all U.S. models.
For vehicles with Satellite Radio
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/SAT button.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
For vehicles with in-dash CD changer
1. Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
display (in the upper display on
vehicles with navigation system).
2. The disc number/icon for an
empty position is highlighted and
the red light starts blinking.
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot
when the green CD load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD
load indicator turns red and blinks
as the CD is loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch (8cm) discs in this system.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
4. When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last CD loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate side of a
preset bar or touching a disc icon.
The system stops playing the current
CD and starts the loading sequence.
It plays the CD just loaded.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
The numbers of the disc and track
playing are shown in the display. On
vehicles with navigation system,
these numbers also appear in the
upper display.
138
Comfort and Convenience Features
On vehicles with in-dash CD changer
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar (1−
6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC −) to
select the previous disc or Preset 6
(DISC +) to select the next disc in
sequence. On vehicles with
navigation system, touch the
appropriate disc icon or press the ▲
or ▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If
you select an empty position in the
CD changer, the system will try to
load the CD in the next available slot.
For Vehicles without Navigation
System
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release
side, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release
side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the
selected disc in the order they are
recorded on the CD. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each track on the selected CD. Press
the SCAN button again to get out of
the system.
Except for LX model
D-SCAN − This function samples
each first track of all the discs in the
in-dash CD changer in the order they
are stored. To activate it, select the
D-SCAN mode by pressing and
holding the SCAN button. You will
see D-SCAN in the display. You will
get a 10 second sampling of the first
track on each CD. Press the SCAN
button again to get out of the system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
REPEAT − To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press the RPT button again
to turn it off.
Except for LX model
D-REPEAT − To continuously
replay the current disc, press and
hold the RPT button. You will see
D-RPT in the display. Press the RPT
button again to turn it off.
RANDOM − Press and release the
RDM button to play the tracks in
random order. You will see RDM in
the display. Press the RDM button
again to return to normal play.
TRACK SCAN − When you touch
this icon on the audio display or
press the SCAN button, you will get
a 10 second sampling of each track
on the current CD. You will see
TRACK SCAN highlighted on the
audio screen and SCAN in the upper
display. Press the icon or button
again to get out of the system.
DISC RPT − When you touch the
DISC RPT icon on the audio display,
the system continuously replays the
current CD. You will see DISC RPT
highlighted on the audio screen and
D-RPT in the upper display. Touch
the icon to turn the feature off.
DISC SCAN − When you touch the
DISC SCAN icon on the audio
display, the system gives you a 10
second sampling of the first track on
each disc in the in-dash CD changer.
You will see DISC SCAN highlighted
on the audio screen and D-SCAN in
the upper display. Touch the icon
again to get out of the system.
RANDOM − When you touch the
RANDOM icon on the audio display,
the system plays the tracks on the
current CD in random order. You
will see RANDOM highlighted on
the audio screen and RDM in the
upper display. To turn this feature
off, touch RANDOM again or select
a different disc icon.
icon again to get out of track repeat.
For Vehicles with Navigation System
To use the controls, press the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, the control
icons will appear on the screen.
TRACK RPT − When you touch
the TRACK RPT icon, the system
continuously plays the same track.
You will see TRACK RPT
highlighted on the audio screen and
RPT in the upper display. Press the
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release
, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release
,
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it twice to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
.
CH/DISC − Press ▲ or ▼ to select
an icon and play the disc.
To Stop Playing a CD
On LX model
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
140
Comfort and Convenience Features
Except for EX-L and EX-V6 models in
the U.S.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the radio while a CD is playing. To
play the CD, press the CD button.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models in the U.S.
Press the AM/FM or CD/SAT
button to switch to the radio or
satellite radio while a CD is playing.
To play the CD, press the CD button
again.
If tape is in the optional tape player,
press the AUX button to switch to
the tape while a CD is playing. Press
the CD button again to switch back
to the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
Removing CD’s From the In-dash
CD Changer
Except for LX model
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the EJECT (
) button.
When a disc is removed from a slot,
the system automatically begins the
load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not remove the disc from the
changer within 15 seconds, the
system returns to the previous mode
(AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc
will reload into the system and will
remain there in a pause mode.
To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset bar, or the
appropriate icon or the CH/DISC bar.
When that CD begins playing, press
the eject button. Continue pressing
the EJECT button to remove all the
discs from the changer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a CD
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
An optional six or eight disc CD
changer is available for your vehicle
from your Honda dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player/changer or the radio.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
On LX model, if there are no CDs in
the changer, the display will flash,
and you will have to select another
mode.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the Preset 5
(DISC −) side or Preset 6 (DISC +)
side of the preset bar. To select the
previous disc, press the Preset 5
(DISC −) or Preset 6 (DISC +) to
select the next disc in sequence.
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Your CDs
General Information
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality CDs labeled for audio
use.
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used in CD players.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Protecting CDs
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
142
Comfort and Convenience Features
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CD Player Error Messages
On LX model
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to a Honda dealer.
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Solution
Press the eject button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see a Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CD Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the
following charts. If you cannot clear
the error message, take your vehicle
to a Honda dealer.
Except for LX model
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CD
Changer
High Temperature
: Without Navigation System
: With Navigation System
144
Comfort and Convenience Features
Solution
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see a Honda dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see a Honda dealer.
Insert CDs.
Will Disappear when the temperature returns
to normal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CD Changer Error Messages
Optional CD Changer for LX model
Error Message
Cause
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
Magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD Changer
Solution
Press the magazine eject button and pull it out,
and check for an error message, and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see a Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull it out,
and check for an error message, and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see a Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
EX and LX-V6 models
LX model
NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
RPT BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
NOISE
REDUCTION
INDICATOR
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
146
RPT
BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
EX-L and EX-V6 models
without Navigation System
(U.S. Vehicles only)
EX-L and EX-V6 models
without Navigation System and Satellite Radio System
NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
RPT
INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
RPT
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BARS
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
EX-L and EX-V6 models
with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles only)
RPT INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
UPPER DISPLAY
CD/SAT BUTTON
AUDIO DISPLAY BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD/DISC BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
NOISE REDUCTION (NR) ICON
148
REW ICON
RPT ICON
PLAY/PROG ICON
FF ICON
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
To Play a Tape
Optional on all U.S. models
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make
sure the open side of the tape is
facing right, then insert the tape
most of the way into the slot. The
system will pull the tape in the rest
of the way, and begin to play it.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the tape is
playing. The ▲ indicates the side
you inserted upward is now playing.
If you want to play the other side,
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
side of the preset bar or touch the
PLAY/PROG icon on vehicles with
navigation system. When the player
reaches the end of the tape, it will
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
On vehicles with navigation system,
first push the AUDIO DISPLAY
button before selecting any of the
audio icons on the audio screen.
Dolby* noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will light in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar
or touching the NR icon. Dolby
remains off until you press the
preset bar or the icon again.
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To Stop Playing a Tape
To remove the tape, press the
EJECT button on the cassette player.
If you want to turn the player off,
press the PWR/VOL knob or turn
off the ignition. The tape will remain
in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the tape will be in
pause mode. Press the Preset 3
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset
bar or touch the PLAY/PROG icon
on vehicles navigation system.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM or CD/AUX button (CD/
SAT button on vehicles with
navigation system). To change back
to the tape player, push the CD/AUX
or CD/SAT button.
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Tape Search Functions
On vehicles without navigation system
FF/REW − To rewind the tape,
push the Preset 1 (REW) side of the
preset bar. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the Preset 2 (FF) side of the
preset bar. You will see FF displayed.
Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the
bars to take the system out of rewind
or fast forward.
On vehicles with navigation system
FF/REW − To fast forward the
tape, push the upper side (▲) of the
CH/DISC bar. You will see FF in the
upper display. To rewind the tape,
push the lower side (▼) of the CH/
DISC bar. You will see REW
displayed. Press either side of the
CH/DISK bar or touch the FF, REW
or PLAY/PROG icon to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
150
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP − Press
side to find the
beginning of the current song or
passage. Press
side to find the
beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
REPEAT − Press the RPT button
or touch the RPT icon to
continuously play a song or passage.
You will see RPT displayed (in the
upper display on vehicles with
navigation system). The track will
repeat until you press the RPT
button or touch the RPT icon again.
NOTE: The SKIP and REPEAT
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Caring for the Tape Player
The tape player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and cause the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your Honda dealer has
a cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam the drive.
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
If you see the error message
‘‘
’’ on the display (on the
upper display on vehicles with
navigation system), press the TAPE
eject button to remove the tape from
the unit. Make sure the tape is not
damaged. If the tape will not eject or
the error message stays on after the
tape ejects, take the vehicle to your
Honda dealer.
Never try to insert foreign object
into the tape player.
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel Controls
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if
equipped). On vehicles with satellite
radio system, you can also select XM
1 and XM2.
On all EX and V6 models
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
152
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
If you are playing a CD, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(+) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it twice to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
number in the display.
If you are playing a tape in the
optional cassette player, press the
top (+) of the CH button to advance
to the next selection. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous selection. The system
senses a silent period, then resumes
playing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio Theft Protection
On EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 models
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code using the preset
bars or the TUNE knob. Because
there are hundreds of number
combinations possible, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this
Owner’s Manual.
If you should happen to lose the card,
you must obtain the code number
from a Honda dealer. To do this, you
will need the system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘
’’/‘‘
’’ in
the frequency display the next time
you turn on the system. Use the
preset bars to enter the code. The
code is located on the radio code
card included in your Owner’s
Manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
You will have to store your favorite
stations on each side of the preset
bars (1−6) or icons after the system
begins working. Your original
settings were lost when the power
was disconnected.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for one hour before
trying again.
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Setting the Clock
On Vehicles without Navigation
System
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
EX-L and EX-V6
without navigation system
DIGITAL CLOCK
PRESET BARS
To set the time, press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink.
Press and hold the H (Preset 4) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time. Press and hold the
M (Preset 5) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time.
Press the Clock Set button
(SOUND) again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
Clock Set (SOUND) button until you
hear a beep, then pressing the R
(Preset 6) side of the bar sets the
154
Comfort and Convenience Features
CLOCK SET BUTTON
clock back to the previous hour. If
the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
On Vehicles with Navigation System
The upper display shows the time
when the ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
The Navigation System receives
signals from the Global Positioning
System (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the Navigation System
Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Security System
On all models except for 4-cylinder LX
model and all Canadian models
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Once the security system is set,
opening either door without using
the key or the remote transmitter,
the hood, or the trunk will cause it to
sound. It also sounds if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release handle
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
Monitor on the instrument panel
(see page 61 ), to see if the doors
and the trunk are fully closed. Since
it is not part of the monitor display,
manually check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using the Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Button on the steering wheel. The
CRUISE MAIN indicator on the
instrument panel will come on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
156
Comfort and Convenience Features
3. Press and release the DECEL/
SET button on the steering wheel.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel comes on
to show the system is now
activated.
The cruise control may not hold the
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel the
cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RESUME/ACCEL
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the DECEL/
SET button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Cancelling the Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
You can cancel the cruise control in
any of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
button on the steering wheel.
158
Comfort and Convenience Features
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), then press and release
the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on, and the vehicle will accelerate to
the same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
button turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
On EX-V6 model
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
The HomeLink transceiver stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
the transmitter if your vehicle’s
battery goes dead or is disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote control
transmitter for the device (garage
door, automatic gate, security
system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson ControlsTM.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
To do this, press and hold the two
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds, or
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
3. Press and hold the remote control
button and one of the HomeLink
buttons at the same time.
Canadian Owners: The remote control
you are training from may stop transmitting after two seconds. This is not
enough for HomeLink to learn the
code. Release and press the button
on the remote control every two
seconds until HomeLink has learned
the code.
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from the HomeLink
transceiver. Make sure you are not
blocking your view of the red light
in HomeLink.
160
Comfort and Convenience Features
4. The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
5. When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
6. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
transceiver button by pushing it. If
the button does not work, repeat
the procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. See if you do by
pressing and holding the
HomeLink transceiver button you
just trained. If the red light blinks
for two seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code garage door
opener. Go to ‘‘Training with a
Rolling Code System’’ (see page
161)
7. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotely
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so they send and
receive the correct codes.
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
TRAINING BUTTON
4. Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 − 4 seconds.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 − 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
light on the garage door opener
unit. (Some systems may require
you to press the button up to three
times.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
3. Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Comfort and Convenience Features
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
You should erase all three codes
before selling the vehicle.
Retraining a Button
To train an already programmed
transceiver button with a new device,
you do not have to erase all the
memory. Train the selected button
over the existing memory code
following the steps under Training
HomeLink.
162
Comfort and Convenience Features
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Honda,
you should know what gasoline to
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
Break-in Period .............................. 164
Gasoline Type ................................ 164
Service Station Procedures .......... 165
Fuel Economy ................................ 170
Accessories and Modifications .... 171
Carrying Cargo .............................. 173
Before Driving
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Break-in Period, Gasoline Type
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Gasoline Type
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
occasional metallic knocking noises
in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance.
On EX-V6 with manual transmission
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are replaced.
We also recommend that you should
not tow a trailer during the first 500
miles (800 km).
164
Before Driving
If you drive with the low engine
speed (below than about 1,000 rpm),
you may feel the engine knocking. In
this case, you can use premium
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 91 or higher to
prevent the engine from knocking.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized Honda dealer for
service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gasoline Type, Service Station Procedures
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
Refueling
Push
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pushing
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
TETHER
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
CONTINUED
Before Driving
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Consult your dealer.
166
Before Driving
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp may come on (see page
269 ).
Opening the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
LATCH
GRIP
CLIP
4-cylinder models
2. Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your finger.
The hood latch handle is above
and to the left of the ‘‘H’’ logo.
Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page 232 ).
3. 4-cylinder models
Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip and insert the
end into the hole on the front of
the hood around the center.
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
To Close the Hood:
Lift it up slightly to remove the
support rod from the hole. Put the
support rod back into its holding
clip. Lower the hood to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender,
then let it drop. Make sure it is
securely latched.
To Close the Hood:
Lower the hood to about a foot (30
cm) above the fender, then press
down firmly with your hands. Make
sure it is securely latched.
Before Driving
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
4-cylinder models
DIPSTICK
(Orange Handle)
6-cylinder models
DIPSTICK
(Orange Loop)
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle/loop).
3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.
4-cylinder models
4. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Oil on page 217 .
168
Before Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
RESERVE TANK
MAX
RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
6-cylinder models
MIN
4-cylinder models
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 221 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
6-cylinder models
MIN
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 204 for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
Before Driving
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
schedule. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks (see page
204 ).
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering and
hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
170
Before Driving
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Every time you slow down and
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use the cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 172 for
additional information.)
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 275 ) or interfere with
proper operation.
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Before Driving
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with nonHonda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
172
Before Driving
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective. See the safety
precautions on page 31 .
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Additional Safety Precaution
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting a
Honda dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKET
CENTER POCKET
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
GLOVE BOX
CONTINUED
Before Driving
173
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
The maximum load limit for your
vehicle is 850 lbs (395 kg). This
figure includes total weight of all
occupants, cargo, accessories, and
the tongue weight if you are towing a
trailer.
To determine the correct cargo and
luggage load limit:
1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850 lbs
(395 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard
(on the driver’s doorjamb).
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle. (Five
is the seating capacity of your
vehicle.)
174
Before Driving
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs (395 kg).
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if there will be four 150
lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115
kg).
4 × 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280
kg)
850 lbs (395 kg) − 600 lbs (280 kg) =
250 lbs (115 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight
of accessories, luggage, and cargo
being loaded in the vehicle. The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4 [250
lbs (115 kg) in this example].
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, the load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
The total weight must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The load for the front and
rear axles also must not exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
(see page 284 ).
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals or seat operation.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you can carry any items on a
roof rack, be sure the total weight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Honda
dealer for further information.
If you fold down the back seat, tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 51 .
Before Driving
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Trunk Hooks
There are hooks on the floor and
sides of the trunk. They can be used
to install a net for securing items.
Cargo Net
On all EX and EX-V6 models
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo
net, store it in the spare tire well.
176
Before Driving
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed/6-speed manual and
automatic transmissions. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Traction Control System,
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
Preparing to Drive ......................... 178
Starting the Engine........................ 179
5-speed/6-speed Manual
Transmission .............................. 180
Automatic Transmission............... 183
Parking Tips ................................... 187
Braking System.............................. 188
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 189
Traction Control System (TCS)... 191
Towing a Trailer ............................ 194
Driving
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 83 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 95 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 74 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
8. Make sure the doors and the
trunk are securely closed and
locked.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 58 ).
178
Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual Transmission:
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Automatic Transmission:
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
NOTICE: The engine is harder to start
in cold weather. Also, the thinner air
f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet
(2,400 meters) adds to this problem.
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in START for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start right away, pause
for at least 10 seconds before
trying again.
Driving
179
Main Menu
Table of Contents
5-speed/6-speed Manual Transmission
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into Reverse, or shift into
one of the forward gears for a
moment. This stops the gears so
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
5-speed M/T
On all 4-cylinder models with 5-speed
manual transmission
On EX-V6 model with 6-speed manual
transmission
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
180
Driving
6-speed M/T
from Fifth to Reverse instead of
Sixth (see page 182 ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
5-speed/6-speed Manual Transmission
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
With 5-speed manual transmission
Shift up
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 mph (25 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (65 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
With 6-speed manual transmission
Shift up
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (75 km/h)
52 mph (83 km/h)
On EX-V6 model
Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long
time on a hot day, be careful before
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
Driving
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
5-speed/6-speed Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Reverse Lockout
6-speed manual transmission only
The 6-speed manual transmission
has an electric lockout so you cannot
accidentally shift from Fifth to
Reverse instead of Sixth while the
vehicle is moving. If you cannot shift
to Reverse when the vehicle is
stopped:
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Driving
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift
to Reverse.
4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to Reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the First/
Second gear side of the Neutral
gate, then shift to Reverse.
182
2. If you are still unable to shift to
Reverse, apply the parking brake
and turn the ignition key to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
These indicators between the tachometer and speedometer show which
position the shift lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and
have the transmission checked by a
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and press
the release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
Park when the ignition switch is in
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I).
CONTINUED
Driving
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
D to D3
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 186 .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
184
Driving
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the side of the shift lever to shift
from Park to Reverse. To shift from
Reverse to Neutral, come to a
complete stop and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into Reverse from Neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from Neutral to
another gear.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D) − Use this position for
normal driving. The transmission
automatically selects a suitable gear
(1 through 5) for speed and
acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
Use Second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
Drive (D3) −This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D3 can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
First (1) − To shift from Second to
First, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. With the lever
in this position, the transmission
locks in First gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, D3, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Second (2) − To shift to Second,
press the release button on the side
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Driving
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
COVER
RELEASE
BUTTON
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or
small metal plate, carefully pry on
the edge of the cover to remove it.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
6. Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then reinstall
the cover. Make sure the notch on
the cover is on the left side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
186
Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking Tips
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors with the key or the
remote transmitter.
On vehicles with security system
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Driving
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Braking System
Your Honda is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
188
Driving
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Braking System Design
Front
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Wear Indicators
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators. All models except for the
4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakes
as standard equipment.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Activating the Anti-lock Brakes
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
ABS INDICATOR
You should never pump the brake pedal;
this defeats the purpose of the ABS.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on, the
anti-lock function of the braking
system has shut down. The brakes
still work like a conventional system,
but without anti-lock. You should
have the dealer inspect your vehicle
as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Driving
189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 271 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your Honda dealer as
soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard
braking which could cause the rear
wheels to lock up and possibly lead
to a loss of control.
On all V6 models
The TCS indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
190
Driving
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent the loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System (TCS)
On all V6 models
Your Honda is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces.
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS Activation
indicator flashes when this occurs.
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your vehicle’s whole
braking system and cannot prevent
skidding if you enter a corner too
fast. It is still your responsibility to
drive at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
TCS INDICATOR
When starting out or driving on a
loose or slippery road surface, you
may notice that the vehicle does not
respond to the accelerator in the
same way it does at other times. This
is a sign TCS is activating. You will
see the TCS Activation indicator
flash.
The TCS indicator (see page 60 )
and the TCS Activation indicator
come on and stay on when there is a
problem with the TCS.
You should still install winter tires on
your vehicle during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Exercise
the same caution in winter driving as
you would if your vehicle was not
equipped with TCS.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page 256 ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
Driving
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS ON/OFF Switch
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
Activation indicator comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
TCS Activation Indicator
The TCS Activation indicator comes
on or flashes under the following
conditions:
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off TCS.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
This switch is under the side vent. It
lets you turn the Traction Control
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS Activation
indicator is flashing.
192
Driving
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem with TCS, the indicator
will come on and stay on along
with the TCS indicator.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System (TCS)
If the TCS indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the TCS inspected by
your Honda dealer. You can still
drive the vehicle without TCS.
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see ABS Indicator on page
189 ).
If the TCS indicator comes on along
with the Brake System indicator, it
indicates a problem in the brake
system (see Brake System
Indicator on page 271 ).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
Driving
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
To safely tow a trailer, you should
observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
Load Limits
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
194
Driving
Total Trailer Weight: The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Tongue Load: The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
4-cylinder models:
(LX)
4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)
(EX, EX-L)
4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)
6-cylinder models:
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at public
scale.
4-cylinder models:
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
(LX)
2,195 lbs (995 kg)
on the front axle
1,960 lbs (890 kg)
on the rear axle
(EX, EX-L)
2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)
on the front axle
1,985 lbs (900 kg)
on the rear axle
6-cylinder models:
2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)
on the front axle
2,005 lbs (910 kg)
on the rear axle
Safety Chains
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let chains drag on the ground.
Driving
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state and province
regulations.
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Lights
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local recreational vehicle dealer
for the requirements in your area,
and use only equipment designed for
your vehicle.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electrically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
196
Driving
See your trailer dealer for more
information on installing electric
brakes.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Additional Trailer Equipment
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page 285 ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages 194 and 195 ).
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Driving
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Parking
Towing Speeds and Gears
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
198
Driving
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently within 3rd, 4th, and 5th
gears while going up a hill, shift to
D3.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
Driving
199
Main Menu
200
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page 303 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 202
Maintenance Schedule .................. 203
Maintenance Schedule
(4-cylinder Models) ................... 205
Maintenance Record ..................... 207
Maintenance Schedule
(6-cylinder Models) ................... 210
Maintenance Record ..................... 212
Fluid Locations............................... 215
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 217
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 218
Engine Coolant ............................... 221
Windshield Washers ..................... 224
Transmission Fluid ........................ 225
Automatic Transmission........... 225
5-speed Manual
Transmission.......................... 228
6-speed Manual
Transmission.......................... 228
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 230
Power Steering Fluid..................... 231
Timing Belt ..................................... 232
Hood Latch ..................................... 232
Lights .............................................. 233
Seat Belts ........................................ 240
Floor Mats ...................................... 240
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 242
Wiper Blades .................................. 243
Tires ................................................ 245
Check the Battery ......................... 252
Vehicle Storage .............................. 254
Maintenance
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
Honda technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
202
Maintenance
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations, and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule assumes
you will use your vehicle as normal
transportation for passengers and
their possessions. You should also
follow these recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other vehicle parts. The load limit
is shown on the tire information
label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within legal
speed limits.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating (see page
164 ).
Which Schedule to Follow:
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
U.S. Owners − Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your vehicle
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Trailer towing, driving with a roof
rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or deiced roads.
NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
should follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Normal Conditions.
Canadian Owners − Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop and go driving, such as a taxi
or a commercial delivery vehicle.
Maintenance
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
Servicing Your Vehicle
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
skilled person to keep your
warranties in effect. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done.
204
Maintenance
U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 168 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 169 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
225 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 230 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
245 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 233 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
4-cylinder Models
140
224
150
240
Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 204 .
*: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
Maintenance
205
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brake wear
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*
Replace manual transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
10
20
30
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130
40
miles x 1,000
16
32
48
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208
64
km x 1,000
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
4-cylinder Models
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brake wear
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter*1
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*2
Replace manual transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130 140
miles x 1,000
16
32
48
64
80
96
112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224
km x 1,000
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty condition)
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first
Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 204 .
*1: See dust and pollen filter on page 242 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
*2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
206
Maintenance
150
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 205 ) or severe
conditions (page 206 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
5,000 mi
8,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
30,000 mi
48,000 km
mi/km
35,000 mi
56,000 km
mi/km
40,000 mi
64,000 km
mi/km
45,000 mi
72,000 km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Date
25,000 mi
40,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
20,000 mi
32,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
15,000 mi
24,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
10,000 mi
16,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
50,000 mi
80,000 km
mi/km
Date
CONTINUED
Maintenance
207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
55,000 mi
88,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
80,000 mi
128,000 km
mi/km
85,000 mi
136,000 km
mi/km
90,000 mi
144,000 km
mi/km
95,000 mi
152,000 km
mi/km
Date
208
Maintenance
mi/km
Date
Date
75,000 mi
120,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
70,000 mi
112,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
65,000 mi
104,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
60,000 mi
96,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
100,000 mi
160,000 km
mi/km
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
105,000 mi
168,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
130,000 mi
208,000 km
mi/km
135,000 mi
216,000 km
mi/km
140,000 mi
224,000 km
mi/km
145,000 mi
232,000 km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Date
125,000 mi
200,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
120,000 mi
192,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
115,000 mi
184,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
110,000 mi
176,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
150,000 mi
240,000 km
mi/km
Date
Maintenance
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
6-cylinder Models
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 )
Replace engine oil filter
Check front and rear brake wear
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*
Replace manual transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
miles x 1,000
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
216
km x 1,000
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first
Every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 204 .
*: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
210
Maintenance
150
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
6-cylinder Models
#:
*1:
*2:
*3:
150
240
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Check engine oil and coolant
Check tires
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 )
Check front and rear brake wear
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Inspect drive belt
Replace dust and pollen filter*1
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace automatic transmission fluid*2
Replace manual transmission fluid
Inspect idle speed
Replace timing belt#*3, and inspect water pump
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
miles x 1,000
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
192
216
km x 1,000
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check inflation and condition once a month
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty condition)
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first
Every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 204 .
See dust and pollen filter on page 242 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
See timing belt on page 232 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Maintenance
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 210 ) or severe
conditions (page 211 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
3,750 mi
6,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
33,750 mi
54,000 km
Date
7,500 mi
12,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
37,500 mi
60,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
45,000 mi
72,000 km
mi/km
48,750 mi
78,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
212
Maintenance
mi/km
Date
56,250 mi
90,000 km
Date
30,000 mi
48,000 km
mi/km
Date
52,500 mi
84,000 km
Date
26,250 mi
42,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
22,500 mi
36,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
18,750 mi
30,000 km
mi/km
Date
41,250 mi
66,000 km
Date
15,000 mi
24,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
11,250 mi
18,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
60,000 mi
96,000 km
mi/km
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
63,750 mi
102,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
93,750 mi
150,000 km
Date
67,500 mi
108,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
97,500 mi
156,000 km
mi/km
101,250 mi
162,000 km
mi/km
105,000 mi
168,000 km
mi/km
108,750 mi
174,000 km
mi/km
112,500 mi
180,000 km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
116,250 mi
186,000 km
Date
90,000 mi
144,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
86,250 mi
138,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
82,500 mi
132,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
78,750 mi
126,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
75,000 mi
120,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
71,250 mi
114,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
120,000 mi
192,000 km
mi/km
Date
CONTINUED
Maintenance
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder Models (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
123,750 mi
198,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
127,500 mi
204,000 km
mi/km
Date
131,250 mi
210,000 km
mi/km
Date
135,000 mi
216,000 km
mi/km
Date
138,750 mi
222,000 km
mi/km
Date
142,500 mi
228,000 km
mi/km
Date
146,250 mi
234,000 km
mi/km
Date
150,000 mi
240,000 km
mi/km
Date
214
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
4-cylinder Models
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
Maintenance
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Gray cap)
(6-speed Manual
Transmission only)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
216
Maintenance
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
4-cylinder models
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
6-cylinder models
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Install the engine oil fill cap and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes and recheck the oil level. Do
not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given on the maintenance
schedule.
Engine Oil Additives
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Ambient Temperature
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your Honda to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
218
Maintenance
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing the Oil and Filter
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
4-cylinder models
2. Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
OIL DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
6-cylinder models
3. Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required.
OIL FILTER
4-cylinder models
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
(4-cylinder models)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
(6-cylinder models)
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
6-cylinder models
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
(4-cylinder models)
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
(6-cylinder models)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
220
Maintenance
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
NOTICE: Improper disposal of engine
oil can be harmf ul to the environment.
If you change your own oil, please
dispose of the used oil properly. Put it
in a sealed container and take it to a
recycling center. Do not discard it in a
trash bin or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Adding Engine Coolant
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
4-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
6-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
4-cylinder models
1. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
6-cylinder models
RADIATOR CAP
3. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
222
Maintenance
4-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Coolant
6-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Maintenance
223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
LEVEL GAUGE
LEVEL GAUGE
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator will come on when the
level is low (see page 63 ).
4-cylinder models
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
224
Maintenance
6-cylinder models
NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze
or a vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Automatic Transmission
4-cylinder models
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the upper mark.
DIPSTICK
GUIDE
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch in the rubber
cap fits in the dipstick guide and
that you push the dipstick in all
the way.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transmission Fluid
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Automatic Transmission
6-cylinder models
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch fits in the
dipstick guide and the dipstick is
down all the way.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
226
Maintenance
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap fits in
the dipstick guide and the dipstick
is down all the way.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
Maintenance
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transmission Fluid
5-speed Manual Transmission
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
6-speed Manual Transmission
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
On EX-V6 model
FILLER BOLT
CHECK BOLT
WASHER
Correct level
On 4-cylinder models
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
228
Maintenance
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your Honda dealer.
DRAIN BOLT
Remove the check bolt and look for
transmission fluid coming out of the
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Transmission Fluid
FILLER BOLT
WASHER
If no fluid comes out, remove the
filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the check bolt
hole. Let the fluid run out until it
stops, then reinstall the check bolt
and the filler bolt.
Pour the fluid to the filler hole slowly
and carefully so you do not spill.
Clean up any spills immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your Honda dealer.
Maintenance
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. There are up to
two reservoirs, depending on the
model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
Replace the brake fluid according to
the recommendation in the
maintenance schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
230
Maintenance
Brake System
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch System
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
4-cylider models
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
6-cylider models
LOWER LEVEL
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt, Hood Latch
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
NOTICE: Turning the steering wheel to
f ull lef t or right lock and holding it
there can damage the power steering
pump.
232
Maintenance
Timing Belt
Hood Latch
6-cylinder models only
PIVOTS
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be performed by a Honda
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has two bulbs on each
side, four in total. Make sure you are
replacing the bulb that is burned out.
Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
NOTICE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
to overheat and shatter.
High Beam Headlight
FASTENERS
AIR INTAKE
COVER
4-cylinder models
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb
on the passenger’s side, undo the
two fasteners and remove the air
intake cover.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
AIR INTAKE
COVER
FASTENERS
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
TAB
BULB
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
4. Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
234
Maintenance
6-cylinder models
TAB
BULB
5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Low Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIPS
7. (Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and
secure them by pushing on the
heads until they lock.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
1. To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
7. Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
AIR INTAKE DUCT
8. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
9. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
10.On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
EX-V6 with M/T
4. On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
To change the low beam headlight
bulb on the driver’s side, remove
the air intake duct. You can reach
the air intake duct from the back
side of the inner fender.
236
Maintenance
5. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
6. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Reinstall the air intake duct
securely.
11.Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
by pushing on the center.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking/Side Marker Light Bulb
1. To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
HOLDING CLIPS
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
4. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Remove the burned out bulb from
the socket by pushing it in and
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
2. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight/
side marker, back-up or turn
signal.
6. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
COVER
1. Open the trunk.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
by pushing on the center.
Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.
5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Install the light assembly cover.
Make sure it snaps into place.
238
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks.
4. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
BULB
SOCKET
1. Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Maintenance
239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Seat Belts
LOOP
Clean dirty seat belts with a soft
brush and a mixture of mild soap and
warm water. Do not use bleach, dye,
or cleaning solvents. They can
weaken the belt material. Let the
belts air dry before you use the
vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Floor Mats
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
put it back in your vehicle.
240
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Floor Mats
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
Make sure the rear floor mat is
properly hooked to the floor mat
anchor. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s seat, the sensors will
detect the decreased weight on the
seat and they may not work properly.
Maintenance
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if airflow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual. Have the dust and pollen filter
replaced by your Honda dealer.
242
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard, or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
To replace a wiper blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
NOTICE: Do not open the hood when
the wiper arms are raised, or you will
damage the hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield. Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
BLADE
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
244
Maintenance
REINFORCEMENT
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade,
and install them in the slots along
the edge of the new blade.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Inflation
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
the same time.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km).
Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 246 .
CONTINUED
Maintenance
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal; do not
release air to match the cold
pressure.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured. You
should look closely for punctures if a
tire starts losing pressure.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
All models except 4-cylinder LX
Tire Size
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
P205/60R16 91V *1
P215/50R17 93V *2
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm ) *1
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm ) *2
*1 EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T
*2 EX-V6 with M/T
4-cylinder LX model
Tire Size
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front:
P205/65R15 92H
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm )
246
Maintenance
All models
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold air pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information,
see page 290 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either or these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Your vehicle’s tires have wear
indicators molded into the tread.
When the tread wears down to that
point, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7
mm) wide band running across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire. A tire that is this worn gives
very little traction on wet roads. You
should replace the tire if you can see
the tread wear indicator in three or
more places around the tire.
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On EX and EX-V6 models
NOTICE: Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only Honda wheel weights
f or balancing.
Maintenance
247
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires every 10,000 miles
(16,000 km) on 4-cylinder models
and 7,500 miles (12,000 km) on
6-cylinder models. Move the tires to
the positions shown in the chart each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
248
Maintenance
Replacing Tires
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your vehicle can
reduce braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy. Using tires of a
different size or construction can
cause the ABS to work inconsistently.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Wheels and Tires
Wheels:
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
LX model
See page 288 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
290 for tire size explanation.
15 x 6 1/2 JJ
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models
Replacement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
16 x 6 1/2 JJ
EX-V6 with M/T model
17 x 7 JJ
Tires:
LX model
P205/65R15 92H
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models
P205/60R16 91V
EX-V6 with M/T model
P215/50R17 93V
Maintenance
249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
250
Maintenance
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Tire Chains
Mount snow chains on your tires
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed,
made by Security Chain Company
(SCC).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
LX
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatic
transmission
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
The chains listed here are available
at many auto supply stores. For a
complete list of stores, visit the SCC
website at www.scc-chain.com.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed.
EX-V6 with manual transmission
CH2412T
These chains are the only ones that
have been approved by Honda for
use on your vehicle. Since Honda
cannot test all chains, you must be
personally responsible for proper
selection, installation, and use of
snow chains.
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Remove the chains as soon as you
begin driving on cleared roads.
NOTICE: Traction devices that are the
wrong size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Maintenance
251
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your Honda dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
4-cylinder models
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
252
Maintenance
6-cylinder models
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Checking the Battery
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Maintenance
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Fill the fuel tank.
Disconnect the battery.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
Block the rear wheels.
254
Maintenance
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
longer, have your Honda dealer
perform the inspections as soon as
you take it out of storage (see pages
205 and 210 ). The 6-cylinder model
needs the inspections called for in
the 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km)
maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) and the 4-cylinder model
needs the inspections called for in
the 2 years/40,000 miles (64,000 km)
maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions). The replacements
called for in the maintenance
schedule are not needed unless the
vehicle has actually reached that
time or mileage.
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 256
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 257
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 262
Jump Starting ................................. 264
If the Engine Overheats ............... 266
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 268
Charging System Indicator........... 269
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 269
Brake System Indicator ................ 271
Emergency Towing ....................... 272
Closing the Moonroof ................... 274
Fuses ............................................... 275
Fuse Locations ............................... 278
Taking Care of the Unexpected
255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the compact spare tire
inflation pressure every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while
driving.
Do not mount snow chains on it.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
On all V6 models
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page 192 ). Driving
with the compact spare tire may
activate the TCS.
256
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
3. The tools are in the trunk. Open
the trunk and raise the trunk floor
by lifting up on the back edge.
TRUNK FLOOR
4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL KIT
SPARE TIRE
JACK
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or Reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
2. Turn on the hazard warning
indicators, and turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT
JACK
6. The jack is behind a cover in the
right fender. Remove the cover by
turning the handle counterclockwise, then pulling on the cover.
258
Taking Care of the Unexpected
7. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
WHEEL WRENCH
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel wrench.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL COVER
JACKING POINT
9. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
WHEEL WRENCH
WHEEL NUTS
10.Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
11. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
WHEEL NUTS
On LX and LX-V6 models
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
HUB
12. Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
260
Taking Care of the Unexpected
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
14.Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WING BOLT
For
For
spare normal
tire
tire
SPACER CONE
15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
16. EX and EX-V6 models
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
17.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
18.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
19. Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
20. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
21. Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
22. Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
262
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 264 .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is
probably something wrong with
the electrical circuit for the
ignition switch or starter motor.
You will need a qualified
technician to determine the
problem (see Emergency Towing
on page 272 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 252 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 264 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 272 .
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 179 .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 76 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 275 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start a Honda with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or like ice, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
NOTICE: If a battery sits in extreme
cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.
264
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4-cylinder models
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
6-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
NOTICE: Driving with the temperature
gauge pointer at the red mark can
cause serious damage to your engine.
266
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all accessories, and turn
on the hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 272 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
8. Using gloves or large heavy cloth,
turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise without pushing
down to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
AUTO at ‘‘
’’). Add coolant
to the radiator up to the base of
the filler neck. If you do not have
the proper coolant mixture
available, you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 272 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
267
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
NOTICE: Running the engine with low
oil pressure can cause serious
mechanical damage almost immediately.
Turn of f the engine as soon as you can
saf ely get the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible and you should
take immediate action.
268
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 168 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 217 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
272 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
Go to a Honda dealer or a service
station where you can get technical
assistance.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause increased
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
269
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator could come on
because of a loose or missing fuel fill
cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at
least three times. Tightening the cap
will not turn the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
days of normal driving.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the indicator remains on, or the
fuel cap was not loose or missing,
have your vehicle checked by the
dealer as soon as possible.
If your vehicle battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes at least
three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
NOTICE: If you keep driving with the
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and the engine. Those repairs
may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
270
Taking Care of the Unexpected
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to ON (II), without
starting the engine. The Malfunction
Indicator Lamp will come on for 20
seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
times, the readiness codes are not
set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for a state emissions test
until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to State Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 296 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake System Indicator
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
*
U.S. indicator shown
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II) and as a reminder
to check the parking brake. It will
stay lit if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 230 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to the dealer and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 272 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have the
vehicle inspected by your Honda
dealer immediately.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to transport your Honda.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground. This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Honda.
272
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Sling-type Equipment − The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the vehicle
off the ground. Your vehicle’s suspension and body can be seriously
damaged. This method of towing
is unacceptable.
If your Honda cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following:
Automatic Transmission:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
NOTICE: Improper towing preparation
will damage the transmission. Follow
the above procedure exactly. If you
cannot shif t the transmission or start
the engine (automatic transmission),
your vehicle must be transported with
the f ront wheels of f the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Manual Transmission:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If you decide to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
make sure you use a properlydesigned and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
described above, and leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I) so
the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
run down the battery.
NOTICE: Trying to lif t or tow your
vehicle by the bumpers will cause
serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE: The steering system can be
damaged if the steering wheel is locked.
Leave the ignition switch in Accessory
(I), and make sure the steering wheel
turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Closing the Moonroof
On EX and EX-V6 models
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
NOTCH
SOCKET
TAB
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page 279 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
4. To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceilling as
shown in the illustration.
274
Taking Care of the Unexpected
MOONROOF WRENCH
ROUND PLUG
5. Insert the moonroof wrench
securely into the socket behind
this plug. Hold the longer handle
as shown and turn the wrench
slowly until the moonroof is fully
closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
If you need to close the moonroof
manually, it means your vehicle’s
moonroof opening/closing function
is developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR
NOTCH
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
two fuse boxes.
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
upward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
The under-hood fuse box is located
on the driver’s side. To open it, push
the tabs as shown.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
278 and 279 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Remove the
screws with a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
276
Taking Care of the Unexpected
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
5. Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with
the fuse puller provided in the underhood fuse box. Make sure you can
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
NOTICE: Replacing a f use with one
that has a higher rating greatly
increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
278
10 A
(30A)
10 A
15 A
10 A
Circuits Protected
Left Headlight Low Beam
(Rear Defroster Coil)
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light
Right Headlight High Beam
Taking Care of the Unexpected
No. Amps.
6
7
8
9
10
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
−
Circuits Protected
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU
Condenser fan
Not Used
11
11*
12
13
14
15
16
17
17*
18
18*
19
20
21
22
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
(40 A)
40 A
100 A
23
50 A
50 A
−
Circuits Protected
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
MG. Clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
ABS Motor
TCS Motor
ABS F/S
TCS
Option
Option
Heater Motor
Battery
Not Used
+B IG1 Main
Power Window Main
* : 6-cylinder models
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
(15 A)
15 A
(10 A)
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
DBW
Ignition Coil
Daytime Running Light*
Laf Heater
Radio
Interior Light
Back-Up Lights
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
No. Amps.
8
9
10
11
12
13
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
30 A
−
−
Circuits Protected
Door Lock
Front Accessory Sockets
IG OPDS (Occupant
Position Detection System)
IG Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
14
15
16
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
−
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
−
−
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
−
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Heated Seats
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
Not Used
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Moonroof
Not Used
IG HAC
Not Used
ACC
HAC OP
* : On Canadian models
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
Main Menu
280
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 282
Specifications
(4-cylinder Models) ................... 284
Specifications
(6-cylinder Models) ................... 286
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 288
Treadwear .................................. 288
Traction....................................... 288
Temperature .............................. 289
Tire Labeling .................................. 290
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 291
Driving in Foreign Countries ....... 292
Emissions Controls........................ 293
The Clean Air Act ...................... 293
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 293
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 293
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 293
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 294
PGM-FI System ..................... 294
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 294
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 294
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 294
Replacement Parts..................... 294
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 295
State Emissions Testing ............... 296
Testing of Readiness Codes ..... 296
Technical Information
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label attached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
282
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
4-cylinder Models
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Technical Information
283
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
187.6 in (4,766 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.7 in (1,415 mm)
105.1 in (2,670 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6−19.4 oz (500−550 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Approx.
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
*1
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Engine oil
Change*2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Manual trans- Change
mission fluid Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
washer
Canada Vehicles
reservoir
1.40 US gal (5.3 )
1.37 US gal (5.2 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3
2.0 US qt (1.9
2.2 US qt (2.1
3.0 US qt (2.8
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
)
)
)
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
284
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
Lights
Headlights
High
Low
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/taillight/side marker lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
High-mount brake light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
Battery
Capacity
Fuses
Interior
Under-hood
12 V − 60 W (HB3)
12 V − 51 W (HB4)
12 V − 24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
21 W
21/5 W
18 W
3 CP
8W
21 W
5W
2 CP
1.1 W
8W
12 V − 38 AH/5 HR
12 V − 47 AH/20 HR
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Alignment
Toe-in
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Camber
Spare
Front
See page 279 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 278 or the fuse box
cover.
Pressure
Rear
Spare
Water cooled 4-stroke i-VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.7 : 1
NGK:
IZFR6K-11
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°
3°15’
P205/65R15 92H *1
P205/60R16 91V *2
T135/90D15 100M
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)*1
)*2
)*1
)*2
)
Technical Information
285
*1 : LX
*2 : EX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
187.6 in (4,766 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.7 in (1,415 mm)
105.1 in (2,670 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6−19.4 oz (500−550 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Approx.
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
*1
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change*2
Engine oil
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Manual
transmission Total
fluid
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
U.S. Vehicles
Windshield
Canada Vehicles
washer
reservoir
Engine
coolant
1.74 US gal (6.6 )
1.77 US gal (6.7 )
2.17 US gal (8.2 )
2.22 US gal (8.4 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
2.3 US qt (2.2 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
3.1 US qt (2.9 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
286
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
Lights
Headlights
High
Low
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/taillight/side marker lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
High-mount brake light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
Battery
Capacity
Fuses
Interior
Under-hood
12 V − 63 W (HB3)
12 V − 51 W (HB4)
12 V − 24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
21 W
21/5 W
18 W
3 CP
8W
21 W
5W
2 CP
1.1 W
8W
12 V − 52 AH/5 HR
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Alignment
Toe-in
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Camber
Spare
See page 279 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 278 or the fuse box
cover.
Pressure
Front
Rear
Spare
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC
6-cylinder gasoline engine
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
183 cu-in (2,997 cm )
10.0 : 1
NGK:
IZFR6K-11
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°
3°15’
P205/60R16 91V *1
P215/50R17 93V *2
T135/90D15 100M *1
T135/80R16 101M *2
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
) *1
) *2
)
*1 : LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmission
*2 : EX-V6 with manual transmission
Technical Information
287
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
288
Technical Information
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Technical Information
289
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
16 − Rim diameter in inches.
91 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
P205/60R16 91V
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
205 − Tire width in millimeters.
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
V
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example TIN.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X − Tire type code.
290
Technical Information
2202 − Date of manufacture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oxygenated Fuels
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
information to be posted on the
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
METHANOL (methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
Technical Information
291
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Foreign Countries
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect performance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the replacement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
292
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on pages
205 and 210 .
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-
case Ventilation valve routes them
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
Technical Information
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
294
Technical Information
ing conditions.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it.
Park your vehicle away from high
grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
4-cylinder models
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
6-cylinder models
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Technical Information
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
296
Technical Information
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (approximately 3
minutes).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th/6th (M/T). Do
not use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Technical Information
297
Main Menu
298
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 300
Warranty Coverages ..................... 301
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. vehicles) ............................ 302
Authorized Manuals ...................... 303
Warranty and Customer Relations
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Warranty and Customer Relations
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 250-4318
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners:
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
300
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 282 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda Accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2004 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2004 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty and Customer Relations
301
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
302
Warranty and Customer Relations
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356
Publication
Form Number
61SDA04
61SDA05
61SDA04EL
61SDA30
31SDN610
31SDA710
31SDNQ10
HON-R
*
Form Description
2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4
Service Manual Base Book
2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6
Service Manual Supplement
2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4/V6
Body Repair Manual
2004 Honda Accord 2 Door L4/V6
Owner’s Manual
2004 Honda Accord L4/V6 Navigation Manual
2004 Honda Accord 2 Door L4/V6
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each*
$70.00
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
$40.00
$50.00
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
4
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$12.00
FREE
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
H
O
N
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.95
GRAND TOTAL
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
304
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Main Menu
Index
A
Accessories..................................... 171
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 77
Accessory Power Sockets............. 103
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 218
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21
Air Conditioning............................. 108
Usage .................................. 113, 115
Air Pressure, Tires ................ 245, 246
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 164
Antifreeze ....................................... 221
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 60, 189
Operation .................................... 189
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 153
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 77
Armrest ............................................. 86
Audio System ................................. 120
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 71
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19
Automatic Speed Control.............. 156
Automatic Transmission............... 183
Capacity, Fluid ................... 284, 286
Checking Fluid Level ........ 225, 226
Shifting ........................................ 183
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 183
Shift Lever Positions ................. 184
Shift Lock Release ..................... 186
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 58, 269
Jump Starting ............................. 264
Maintenance ............................... 252
Specifications ..................... 285, 287
Before Driving ............................... 163
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders ............................ 99
Booster Seats ................................... 48
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 189
Break-in, New Linings .............. 164
Bulb Replacement ..................... 238
Fluid ............................................ 230
Parking .......................................... 97
System Indicator .................. 59, 271
Wear Indicators ......................... 188
Braking System.............................. 188
Break-in, New Car ......................... 164
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 72
Brights, Headlights ......................... 70
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 238
Brake Lights............................... 238
Front Parking Lights ................. 237
Headlights .................................. 233
High-mount Brake Light .......... 239
Specifications ..................... 285, 287
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 237
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 233
C
Capacities Chart .................... 284, 286
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 51
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 173
Cargo Net ....................................... 176
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
CD Care .......................................... 142
CD Changer.................................... 137
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 144
CONTINUED
I
Main Menu
Index
CD Error Messages ...................... 143
CD Player........................................ 134
CD Pocket, Center......................... 100
Certification Label ......................... 282
Chains, Tires .................................. 250
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 257
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 218
When to .............................. 205, 210
Charging System Indicator .... 58, 269
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 178
Child Safety ...................................... 32
Booster Seats ............................... 48
Child Seats .............................. 32, 39
Inportant Safety
Reminders .......................... 32, 36
Infants ........................................... 37
Larger Children ........................... 47
LATCH.......................................... 41
Risks with Airbags....................... 33
Small Children.............................. 38
Tethers.......................................... 45
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33
Child Seats ........................................ 39
LATCH.......................................... 41
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 45
II
Cleaning
Seat Belts .................................... 240
Climate Control System ................ 115
Clock ............................................... 154
Clutch Fluid .................................... 231
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 294
Coin Pocket .................................... 101
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 179
Compact Spare Tire....................... 256
Console Compartment .................. 100
Consumer Information*................ 300
Controls, Instruments and .............. 55
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 221
Checking ..................................... 169
Proper Solution .......................... 221
Temperature Gauge .................... 67
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 293
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 63
Cruise Control Operation ............. 156
Cup Holders...................................... 99
Customer Service Office .............. 300
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Dashboard .................................... 2, 57
Daytime Running Lights................. 71
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 63
Dead Battery .................................. 264
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 302
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 73
Defrosting the
Windows ..................................... 114
Dimensions ............................. 284, 286
Dimming the Headlights ................ 70
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission .. 225, 226
Engine Oil ................................... 168
Directional Signals ........................... 70
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 188
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 220
Doors
Locking and Unlocking ............... 78
Power Door Locks ....................... 78
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 288
Downshifting, Manual
Transmission .............................. 180
Main Menu
Index
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 177
Economy ..................................... 170
In Foreign Countries ................. 292
Dual Temperature Control ........... 117
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 242
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 170
Emergencies................................... 255
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 264
Brake System Indicator ............ 271
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 257
Charging System Indicator ...... 269
Checking the Fuses................... 275
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 72
Jump Starting ............................. 264
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 268
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 269
Manually Closing Moonroof .... 274
Overheated Engine ................... 266
Towing ........................................ 272
Emergency Brake ............................ 97
Emergency Flashers ....................... 72
Emergency Towing ....................... 272
Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 82
Emissions Controls........................ 293
Emissions Testing, State .............. 296
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 67
If It Won’t Start .......................... 262
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 58, 269
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 58, 268
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 217
Overheating................................ 266
Specifications ..................... 285, 287
Speed Limiter ..................... 182, 185
Starting........................................ 179
Engine Speed Limiter ........... 182, 185
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 164
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 293
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 51
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 110
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 107
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 165
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 242
Oil ................................................ 218
5-speed Manual Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 228
5-speed Manual Transmission
Shifting the ................................. 180
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 72
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 257
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .. 225, 226
Brake ........................................... 230
Clutch .......................................... 231
Manual Transmission ............... 228
Power Steering........................... 231
Windshield Washer ................... 224
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 89
Foreign Countries, Driving in ...... 292
Four-way Flashers ........................... 72
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 22
Front Seat ................................... 83, 85
Adjusting................................. 83, 85
Heaters.......................................... 90
Airbags ...................................... 9, 22
CONTINUED
III
Main Menu
Index
Fuel .................................................. 164
Fill Door and Cap....................... 165
Gauge ............................................ 67
Octane Requirement ................. 164
Oxygenated ................................ 164
Tank, Refueling ......................... 165
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 275
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 170
Gasohol ........................................... 164
Gasoline .......................................... 164
Gauge ............................................ 67
Octane Requirement ................. 164
Tank, Refueling ......................... 165
Gas Station Procedures................. 165
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 67
Fuel ................................................ 67
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 183
5-speed Manual
Transmission.......................... 180
6-speed Manual
Transmission.......................... 180
IV
Glove Box ......................................... 99
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) ...................................... 195
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 233
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 72
Headlights......................................... 70
Aiming ......................................... 233
Automatic Lighting Off ............... 71
Daytime Running Lights............. 71
Low Beams, Turning on ............. 70
Reminder Chime .......................... 70
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 233
Turning on .................................... 70
Head Restraints ............................... 88
Heating and Cooling ...................... 108
Heated Mirror .................................. 96
Heater, Seat ...................................... 90
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 179
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 159
Hood Latch ..................................... 232
Hood, Opening the ........................ 166
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 231
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 282
Ignition
Keys............................................... 75
Switch ............................................ 77
Timing Control System ............. 294
Immobilizer System......................... 76
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators .......................................... 58
ABS (Auti-lock Brake) ........ 60, 189
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 59, 271
Charging System ................. 58, 269
Cruise Control .............................. 63
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 63
High Beam.................................... 63
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 61
Low Fuel ....................................... 62
Low Oil Pressure ................. 58, 268
Side Airbag Off ............................ 59
SRS ................................................ 59
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 61
Washer Level ............................... 63
Main Menu
Index
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 58
Infant Restraint ................................ 37
Infant Seats ....................................... 37
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 45
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 245
Inside Mirror .................................... 95
Inspection, Tire .............................. 247
Instrument Panel ............................. 57
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 72
Interior Lights ................................ 103
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Car ......................... 259
Jack, Tire ........................................ 258
Jump Starting ................................. 264
K
Keys ................................................... 75
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 18
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 233
Indicator ........................................ 57
Parking .......................................... 70
Turn Signal ................................... 70
Load Limit ...................................... 174
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 77
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 77
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 165
Glove Box ..................................... 99
Trunk ............................................ 82
Low Coolant Level ................. 169, 221
Lower Gear, Downshifting
to a ............................................... 180
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 58, 268
Lubricant Specifications
Chart ................................... 284, 286
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 173
Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 176
M
Maintenance ................................... 201
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 204
Record ................................. 207, 212
Required Indicator ....................... 63
Safety........................................... 202
Schedule ............... 205-206, 210-211
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 58, 269
Manual Transmission.................... 180
Manual Transmission
Fluid .................................... 228, 229
Meters, Gauges ................................ 65
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 164
Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 96
Modifications.................................. 172
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 172
Moonroof .......................................... 94
Closing Manually ....................... 274
Operation ...................................... 94
L
Label, Certification ........................ 282
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 70
CONTINUED
V
Main Menu
Index
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 184
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 164
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 181
NOTICE, Explanation of ................... ii
Numbers, Identification ................ 282
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 164
Odometer .......................................... 65
Odometer/Outside Temperature
Indicator ................................. 65, 66
Odometer, Trip ................................ 65
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 218
Change, When to ............... 205, 210
Checking Engine ....................... 168
Pressure Indicator ............... 58, 268
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 218
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 77
Operation in Foreign Countries ... 292
Outside Mirrors ............................... 96
Outside Temperature ...................... 66
VI
Overheating, Engine ..................... 266
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 204
Oxygenated Fuel ........................... 164
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 72
Park Gear Position......................... 184
Parking ............................................ 187
Parking Brake .................................. 97
Parking Lights.................................. 70
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 187
PGM-FI System.............................. 294
Pollen Filter .................................... 242
Power Door Locks ........................... 78
Power Socket Locations.................. 98
Power Windows ............................... 91
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 16
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Protecting Children ......................... 32
Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Protecting Larger Children ........ 47
Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 45
Using LATCH .............................. 41
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 266
Radio/CD Sound
System................................. 120, 134
Readiness Codes ............................ 270
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 238
Rear Seat Access ............................. 86
Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 89
Rear View Mirror ............................. 95
Rear Window Defogger .................. 73
Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 83, 85
Recommended Shift
Speeds ......................................... 181
Reminder Indicators ........................ 58
Remote Transmitter ........................ 79
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 242
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 218
Fuses ........................................... 275
Light Bulbs ................................. 233
Schedule ............................. 205, 210
Main Menu
Index
Tires ............................................ 248
Wiper Blades .............................. 243
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 19
Reserve Tank, Coolant.......... 169, 221
Restraint, Child ................................ 32
Reverse Gear Position................... 184
Roof Rack ....................................... 175
Rotation, Tire ................................. 248
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 302
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ...................................... 9, 21
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 52
Safety Messages ................................ ii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 19
Cleaning ...................................... 240
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 18
Maintenance ................................. 19
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 18, 58
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Seat Heaters ..................................... 90
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 83
Security System ............................. 155
Select/Reset Knob .................... 65, 66
Serial Number ................................ 282
Service Intervals .................... 205, 210
Service Manual* ............................ 303
Service Station Procedures .......... 165
Setting the Clock ........................... 154
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 183
Shift Lock Release ......................... 186
Side Airbags ..................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 28
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 27
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 27
Signaling Turns ................................ 70
6-speed Manual Transmission ..... 180
Fluid Level .................................. 228
Shifting ........................................ 180
Reverse Lockout ........................ 182
Snow Tires ...................................... 250
Sound System ................................. 120
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 256
Specifications ..................... 285, 287
Spark Plugs............................. 285, 287
Specifications Charts ............ 284, 286
Speed Control ................................. 156
Speed Limiter ......................... 182, 185
SRS, Additional Information........... 21
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31
How Your Airbags
Work ............................. 22, 26, 27
How Your SRS Indicator
Works ........................................ 27
SRS Components ......................... 21
SRS Service................................... 30
SRS Indicator.............................. 27, 59
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 77
Starting the Engine........................ 179
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 179
With a Dead Battery ................. 264
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 266
CONTINUED
VII
Main Menu
Index
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 74
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 77
Steering Wheel Buttons ................ 152
Stereo Sound
System......................................... 120
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 254
Sun Visor......................................... 101
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 103
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 30
SRS Indicator.......................... 27, 59
System Components.................... 21
Synthetic Oil ................................... 218
T
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 238
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 255
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 288
Emissions Control Systems ...... 293
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 164
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 295
Temperature Gauge ........................ 67
VIII
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 119
Temperature, Outside ..................... 66
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 45
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 295
Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 74
Time, Setting the ........................... 154
Timing Belt ..................................... 232
Tire Chains ..................................... 250
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 257
Tire Information ............................ 290
Tires ................................................ 245
Air Pressure ....................... 245, 246
Chains ......................................... 250
Checking Wear .......................... 247
Compact Spare ........................... 256
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 288
Inflation ....................................... 245
Inspection ................................... 247
Labeling ...................................... 290
Replacing .................................... 248
Rotating....................................... 248
Snow ............................................ 250
Specifications ..................... 285, 287
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 257
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 194
Emergency Wrecker ................. 272
Equipment and Accessories ..... 196
Weight Limit ...................... 194, 195
Traction Control System (TCS)... 191
TCS Activation Indicator .... 60, 192
TCS Indicator ....................... 60, 191
TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 192
Trailer Loading .............................. 194
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 198
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ....................... 225, 226
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 228
Fluid Selection ................... 225, 228
Identification Number ............... 283
Shifting the Automatic .............. 183
Shifting the Manual ................... 180
Treadwear ...................................... 288
Trip Meter ........................................ 66
Trunk................................................. 82
Emergency Opener ..................... 82
Hooks .......................................... 176
Opening the .................................. 82
Open Monitor Indicator .............. 61
Turn Signals ..................................... 70
Main Menu
Index
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 255
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 288
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 164
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 220
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 102
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 174
Vehicle Dimensions .............. 284, 286
Vehicle Identification Number..... 282
Vehicle Storage .............................. 254
VIN .................................................. 282
Viscosity, Oil................................... 218
W
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 74
Alignment and Balance ............. 247
Compact Spare ........................... 256
Wrench ....................................... 258
Windows
Auto Reverse ................................ 92
Operating the Power ................... 91
Rear, Defogger ............................ 73
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 69
Washers ........................................ 69
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 243
Operation ...................................... 69
Worn Tires ..................................... 247
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 272
*
: U.S. only
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 52
Warranty Coverages* ................... 301
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 224
Operation ...................................... 69
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 217 ).
5-speed/6-speed Manual
Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see
pages 228 and 229 ).
Capacity:
5-speed manual transmission:
2.0 US qt (1.9 )
6-speed manual transmission:
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4-cylinder models
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
6-cylinder models
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages 225 and 227 ).
2.3 US qt (2.2 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 231 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 230 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
4-cylinder LX
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
EX-V6 with M/T
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
All other models
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement